Ելք / Exodus - 26 |

Text:
< PreviousԵլք - 26 Exodus - 26Next >


jg▾ tr▾ ac▾ mh▾ all ▾
Matthew Henry: Concise Commentary on the Whole Bible - 1706
Moses here receives instructions, I. Concerning the inner curtains of the tent or tabernacle, and the coupling of those curtains, ver. 1-6. II. Concerning the outer curtains which were of goats' hair, to strengthen the former, ver. 7-13. III. Concerning the case or cover which was to secure it from the weather, ver. 14. IV. Concerning the boards which were to be reared up to support the curtains, with their bars and sockets, ver. 15-30. V. The partition between the holy place and the most holy, ver. 31-35. VI. The veil for the door, ver. 36, 37. These particulars, thus largely recorded, seem of little use to us now; yet, having been of great use to Moses and Israel, and God having thought fit to preserve down to us the remembrance of them, we ought not to overlook them. Even the antiquity renders this account venerable.
Adam Clarke: Commentary on the Bible - 1831
The ten curtains of the tabernacle, and of what composed, Exo 26:1. Their length, Exo 26:2, Exo 26:3; their loops, Exo 26:4, Exo 26:5; their taches, Exo 26:6. The curtains of goats' hair for a covering, Exo 26:7; their length and breadth, Exo 26:8. Coupled with loops, Exo 26:9, Exo 26:10, and taches, Exo 26:11. The remnant of the curtains, how to be employed, Exo 26:12, Exo 26:13. The covering of rams' skins, Exo 26:14. The boards of the tabernacle for the south side, Exo 26:15; their length, Exo 26:16, tenons, Exo 26:17, number, Exo 26:18, sockets, Exo 26:19. Boards, etc., for the north side, Exo 26:20, Exo 26:21. Boards, etc., for the west side, Exo 26:22; for the corners, Exo 26:23; their rings and sockets, Exo 26:24, Exo 26:25. The bars of the tabernacle, Exo 26:26-30. The veil, its pillars, hooks, and taches, Exo 26:31-33. How to place the mercy-seat, Exo 26:34. The table and the candlestick, Exo 26:35. The hanging for the door of the tent, Exo 26:36; and the hangings for the pillars, Exo 26:37.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
Exo 26:1, The ten curtains of the tabernacle; Exo 26:7, The eleven curtains of goats' hair, and the covering of rams' and badgers' skins; Exo 26:15, The boards of the tabernacle, with their sockets and bars; Exo 26:31, The vail for the ark; Exo 26:36, The hanging for the door.
John Gill
INTRODUCTION TO EXODUS 26
In this chapter a description is given of the tabernacle itself, and first of its inward curtains, of their number, matter, length, and breadth, and the manner of coupling them together, Ex 26:1, and then of the outward curtains of it, their number, matter, length, and breadth, and coupling, and how disposed of, Ex 26:7, and next of the two coverings of the tabernacle, of rams' skins and badgers' skins, Ex 22:14, the boards for the tabernacle are also described, with their tenons and sockets, Ex 26:15 and the bars and rings for it, by which it was kept firm together, Ex 26:26, an account is given of the vail between the holy and the most holy place, Ex 26:31, and of the hanging for the door of the tabernacle, Ex 26:36.
26:126:1: Եւ արասցես խորա՛ն տասնփեղկեան։ ՚ի բեհեզոյ մանելոյ, եւ ՚ի կապուտակէ, եւ ՚ի ծիրանւոյ, եւ ՚ի կարմրոյ կրկնելոյ։ քերոբ՝ գո՛րծ անկուածոյ գործեսցես զնոսա։
1 «Նրբահիւս բեհեզից, կապոյտ, ծիրանի եւ կրկնակի կարմիր կտաւից տասշերտանի վարագոյրով խորան կը պատրաստես: Այն կը զարդարես ասեղնագործ քերովբէներով:
26 «Խորանը շինէ՛ տասը վարագոյրներով՝ մանուած բարակ քթանէ ու կապուտակէ եւ ծիրանեգոյնէ ու կրկնակի կարմիրէ. վարպետի գործ շինէ՛ զանոնք քերովբէներով։
Եւ արասցես խորան տասնփեղկեան, ի բեհեզոյ մանելոյ եւ ի կապուտակէ եւ ի ծիրանւոյ եւ ի կարմրոյ կրկնելոյ. [356]քերոբ` գործ անկուածոյ`` գործեսցես զնոսա:

26:1: Եւ արասցես խորա՛ն տասնփեղկեան։ ՚ի բեհեզոյ մանելոյ, եւ ՚ի կապուտակէ, եւ ՚ի ծիրանւոյ, եւ ՚ի կարմրոյ կրկնելոյ։ քերոբ՝ գո՛րծ անկուածոյ գործեսցես զնոսա։
1 «Նրբահիւս բեհեզից, կապոյտ, ծիրանի եւ կրկնակի կարմիր կտաւից տասշերտանի վարագոյրով խորան կը պատրաստես: Այն կը զարդարես ասեղնագործ քերովբէներով:
26 «Խորանը շինէ՛ տասը վարագոյրներով՝ մանուած բարակ քթանէ ու կապուտակէ եւ ծիրանեգոյնէ ու կրկնակի կարմիրէ. վարպետի գործ շինէ՛ զանոնք քերովբէներով։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
26:11: Скинию же сделай из десяти покрывал крученого виссона и из голубой, пурпуровой и червленой [шерсти], и херувимов сделай на них искусною работою;
26:1 καὶ και and; even τὴν ο the σκηνὴν σκηνη tent ποιήσεις ποιεω do; make δέκα δεκα ten αὐλαίας αυλαια from; out of βύσσου βυσσος fine linen κεκλωσμένης κλωθω and; even ὑακίνθου υακινθος hyacinth καὶ και and; even πορφύρας πορφυρα purple καὶ και and; even κοκκίνου κοκκινος scarlet κεκλωσμένου κλωθω cherubim ἐργασίᾳ εργασια occupation; effort ὑφάντου υφαντης do; make αὐτάς αυτος he; him
26:1 וְ wᵊ וְ and אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] הַ ha הַ the מִּשְׁכָּ֥ן mmiškˌān מִשְׁכָּן dwelling-place תַּעֲשֶׂ֖ה taʕᵃśˌeh עשׂה make עֶ֣שֶׂר ʕˈeśer עֶשֶׂר ten יְרִיעֹ֑ת yᵊrîʕˈōṯ יְרִיעָה curtain שֵׁ֣שׁ šˈēš שֵׁשׁ linen מָשְׁזָ֗ר mošzˈār שׁזר twist וּ û וְ and תְכֵ֤לֶת ṯᵊḵˈēleṯ תְּכֵלֶת purple wool וְ wᵊ וְ and אַרְגָּמָן֙ ʔargāmˌān אַרְגָּמָן purple-wool וְ wᵊ וְ and תֹלַ֣עַת ṯōlˈaʕaṯ תֹּולַעַת worm שָׁנִ֔י šānˈî שָׁנִי scarlet כְּרֻבִ֛ים kᵊruvˈîm כְּרוּב cherub מַעֲשֵׂ֥ה maʕᵃśˌē מַעֲשֶׂה deed חֹשֵׁ֖ב ḥōšˌēv חשׁב account תַּעֲשֶׂ֥ה taʕᵃśˌeh עשׂה make אֹתָֽם׃ ʔōṯˈām אֵת [object marker]
26:1. tabernaculum vero ita fiet decem cortinas de bysso retorta et hyacintho ac purpura coccoque bis tincto variatas opere plumario faciesAnd thou shalt make the tabernacle in this manner: Thou shalt make ten curtains of fine twisted linen, and violet and purple, and scarlet twice dyed, diversified with embroidery.
1. Moreover thou shalt make the tabernacle with ten curtains; of fine twined linen, and blue, and purple, and scarlet, with cherubim the work of the cunning workman shalt thou make them.
Moreover thou shalt make the tabernacle [with] ten curtains [of] fine twined linen, and blue, and purple, and scarlet: [with] cherubims of cunning work shalt thou make them:

1: Скинию же сделай из десяти покрывал крученого виссона и из голубой, пурпуровой и червленой [шерсти], и херувимов сделай на них искусною работою;
26:1
καὶ και and; even
τὴν ο the
σκηνὴν σκηνη tent
ποιήσεις ποιεω do; make
δέκα δεκα ten
αὐλαίας αυλαια from; out of
βύσσου βυσσος fine linen
κεκλωσμένης κλωθω and; even
ὑακίνθου υακινθος hyacinth
καὶ και and; even
πορφύρας πορφυρα purple
καὶ και and; even
κοκκίνου κοκκινος scarlet
κεκλωσμένου κλωθω cherubim
ἐργασίᾳ εργασια occupation; effort
ὑφάντου υφαντης do; make
αὐτάς αυτος he; him
26:1
וְ wᵊ וְ and
אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker]
הַ ha הַ the
מִּשְׁכָּ֥ן mmiškˌān מִשְׁכָּן dwelling-place
תַּעֲשֶׂ֖ה taʕᵃśˌeh עשׂה make
עֶ֣שֶׂר ʕˈeśer עֶשֶׂר ten
יְרִיעֹ֑ת yᵊrîʕˈōṯ יְרִיעָה curtain
שֵׁ֣שׁ šˈēš שֵׁשׁ linen
מָשְׁזָ֗ר mošzˈār שׁזר twist
וּ û וְ and
תְכֵ֤לֶת ṯᵊḵˈēleṯ תְּכֵלֶת purple wool
וְ wᵊ וְ and
אַרְגָּמָן֙ ʔargāmˌān אַרְגָּמָן purple-wool
וְ wᵊ וְ and
תֹלַ֣עַת ṯōlˈaʕaṯ תֹּולַעַת worm
שָׁנִ֔י šānˈî שָׁנִי scarlet
כְּרֻבִ֛ים kᵊruvˈîm כְּרוּב cherub
מַעֲשֵׂ֥ה maʕᵃśˌē מַעֲשֶׂה deed
חֹשֵׁ֖ב ḥōšˌēv חשׁב account
תַּעֲשֶׂ֥ה taʕᵃśˌeh עשׂה make
אֹתָֽם׃ ʔōṯˈām אֵת [object marker]
26:1. tabernaculum vero ita fiet decem cortinas de bysso retorta et hyacintho ac purpura coccoque bis tincto variatas opere plumario facies
And thou shalt make the tabernacle in this manner: Thou shalt make ten curtains of fine twisted linen, and violet and purple, and scarlet twice dyed, diversified with embroidery.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jfb▾ jw▾ jg▾ gnv▾ kad▾ tr▾ ab▾ ac▾ mh▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
1: Первый из покровов скинии, так называемый нижний, внутренний, по своему материалу имел сходство с разноцветной завесой, отделяющей святилище от святого святых (ст. 31). Он был сделан работой «choscheb» по греч. «ergon ufanton», представлявшей, по древнему преданию, ту особенность, что она давала ткани два разные вида с лица и изнанки. На одной стороне по трехцветному полю были вышиты изображения херувимов.
Matthew Henry: Concise Commentary on the Whole Bible - 1706
The Tabernacle and Its Furniture.B. C. 1491.
1 Moreover thou shalt make the tabernacle with ten curtains of fine twined linen, and blue, and purple, and scarlet: with cherubims of cunning work shalt thou make them. 2 The length of one curtain shall be eight and twenty cubits, and the breadth of one curtain four cubits: and every one of the curtains shall have one measure. 3 The five curtains shall be coupled together one to another; and other five curtains shall be coupled one to another. 4 And thou shalt make loops of blue upon the edge of the one curtain from the selvedge in the coupling; and likewise shalt thou make in the uttermost edge of another curtain, in the coupling of the second. 5 Fifty loops shalt thou make in the one curtain, and fifty loops shalt thou make in the edge of the curtain that is in the coupling of the second; that the loops may take hold one of another. 6 And thou shalt make fifty taches of gold, and couple the curtains together with the taches: and it shall be one tabernacle.
I. The house must be a tabernacle or tent, such as soldiers now use in the camp, which was both a mean dwelling and a movable one; and yet the ark of God had not better, till Solomon built the temple 480 years after this, 1 Kings vi. 1. God manifested his presence among them thus in a tabernacle, 1. In compliance with their present condition in the wilderness, that they might have him with them wherever they went. Note, God suits the tokens of his favour, and the gifts of his grace, to his people's wants and necessities, according as they are, accommodating his mercy to their state, prosperous or adverse, settled or unsettled. When thou passest through the waters, I will be with thee, Isa. xliii. 2. 2. That it might represent the state of God's church in this world, it is a tabernacle-state, Ps. xv. 1. We have here no continuing city; being strangers in this world, and travellers towards a better, we shall never be fixed till we come to heaven. Church-privileges are movable goods, from one place to another; the gospel is not tied to any place; the candlestick is in a tent, and may easily be taken away, Rev. ii. 5. If we make much of the tabernacle, and improve the privilege of it, wherever we go it will accompany us; but, if we neglect and disgrace it, wherever we stay it will forsake us. What hath my beloved to do in my house? Jer. xi. 15.
II. The curtains of the tabernacle must correspond to a divine pattern. 1. They were to be very rich, the best of the kind, fine twined linen; and colours very pleasing, blue, and purple, and scarlet. 2. They were to be embroidered with cherubim (v. 1), to intimate that the angels of God pitch their tents round about the church, Ps. xxxiv. 7. As there were cherubim over the mercy-seat, so there were round the tabernacle; for we find the angels compassing, not only the throne, but the elders; see Rev. v. 11. 3. There were to be two hangings, five breadths in each, sewed together, and the two hangings coupled together with golden clasps, or tacks, so that it might be all one tabernacle, v. 6. Thus the churches of Christ and the saints, though they are many, are yet one, being fitly joined together in holy love, and by the unity of the Spirit, so growing into one holy temple in the Lord, Eph. ii. 21, 22; iv. 16. This tabernacle was very strait and narrow; but, at the preaching of the gospel, the church is bidden to enlarge the place of her tent, and to stretch forth her curtains, Isa. liv. 2.
7 And thou shalt make curtains of goats' hair to be a covering upon the tabernacle: eleven curtains shalt thou make. 8 The length of one curtain shall be thirty cubits, and the breadth of one curtain four cubits: and the eleven curtains shall be all of one measure. 9 And thou shalt couple five curtains by themselves, and six curtains by themselves, and shalt double the sixth curtain in the forefront of the tabernacle. 10 And thou shalt make fifty loops on the edge of the one curtain that is outmost in the coupling, and fifty loops in the edge of the curtain which coupleth the second. 11 And thou shalt make fifty taches of brass, and put the taches into the loops, and couple the tent together, that it may be one. 12 And the remnant that remaineth of the curtains of the tent, the half curtain that remaineth, shall hang over the backside of the tabernacle. 13 And a cubit on the one side, and a cubit on the other side of that which remaineth in the length of the curtains of the tent, it shall hang over the sides of the tabernacle on this side and on that side, to cover it. 14 And thou shalt make a covering for the tent of rams' skins dyed red, and a covering above of badgers' skins.
Moses is here ordered to make a double covering for the tabernacle, that it might not rain in, and that the beauty of those fine curtains might not be damaged. 1. There was to be a covering of hair camlet curtains, which were somewhat larger every way than the inner curtains, because they were to enclose them, and probably were stretched out at some little distance from them, v. 7, &c. These were coupled together with brass clasps. The stuff being less valuable, the tacks were so; but the brass tacks would answer the intention as effectually as the golden ones. The bonds of unity may be as strong between curtains of goats' hair as between those of purple and scarlet. 2. Over this there was to be another covering, and that a double one (v. 14), one of rams' skins dyed red, probably dressed with the wool on; another of badgers' skins, so we translate it, but it should rather seem to have been some strong sort of leather (but very fine), for we read of the best sort of shoes being made of it, Ezek. xvi. 10. Now observe here, (1.) That the outside of the tabernacle was coarse and rough, the beauty of it was in the inner curtains. Those in whom God dwells must labour to be better than they seem to be. Hypocrites put the best side outwards, like whited sepulchres; but the king's daughter is all glorious within (Ps. xlv. 13); in the eye of the world black as the tents of Kedar, but, in the eye of God, comely as the curtains of Solomon, Cant. i. 5. Let our adorning be that of the hidden man of the heart, which God values, 1 Pet. iii. 4. (2.) That where God places his glory he will create a defence upon it; even upon the habitations of the righteous there shall be a covert, Isa. vi. 5, 6. The protection of Providence shall always be upon the beauty of holiness. God's tent will be a pavilion, Ps. xxvii. 5.
15 And thou shalt make boards for the tabernacle of shittim wood standing up. 16 Ten cubits shall be the length of a board, and a cubit and a half shall be the breadth of one board. 17 Two tenons shall there be in one board, set in order one against another: thus shalt thou make for all the boards of the tabernacle. 18 And thou shalt make the boards for the tabernacle, twenty boards on the south side southward. 19 And thou shalt make forty sockets of silver under the twenty boards; two sockets under one board for his two tenons, and two sockets under another board for his two tenons. 20 And for the second side of the tabernacle on the north side there shall be twenty boards: 21 And their forty sockets of silver; two sockets under one board, and two sockets under another board. 22 And for the sides of the tabernacle westward thou shalt make six boards. 23 And two boards shalt thou make for the corners of the tabernacle in the two sides. 24 And they shall be coupled together beneath, and they shall be coupled together above the head of it unto one ring: thus shall it be for them both; they shall be for the two corners. 25 And they shall be eight boards, and their sockets of silver, sixteen sockets; two sockets under one board, and two sockets under another board. 26 And thou shalt make bars of shittim wood; five for the boards of the one side of the tabernacle, 27 And five bars for the boards of the other side of the tabernacle, and five bars for the boards of the side of the tabernacle, for the two sides westward. 28 And the middle bar in the midst of the boards shall reach from end to end. 29 And thou shalt overlay the boards with gold, and make their rings of gold for places for the bars: and thou shalt overlay the bars with gold. 30 And thou shalt rear up the tabernacle according to the fashion thereof which was showed thee in the mount.
Very particular directions are here given about the boards of the tabernacle, which were to bear up the curtains, as the stakes of a tent which had need to be strong, Isa. liv. 2. These boards had tenons which fell into the mortises that were made for them in silver bases. God took care to have every thing strong, as well as fine, in his tabernacle. Curtains without boards would have been shaken by every wind; but it is a good thing to have the heart established with grace, which is as the boards to support the curtains of profession, which otherwise will not hold out long. The boards were coupled together with gold rings at top and bottom (v. 24), and kept firm with bars that ran through golden staples in every board (v. 26), and the boards and bars were all richly gilded, v. 29. Thus every thing in the tabernacle was very splendid, agreeable to that infant state of the church, when such things were proper enough to please children, to possess the minds of the worshippers with a reverence of the divine glory, and to affect them with the greatness of that prince who said, Here will I dwell; in allusion to this the new Jerusalem is said to be of pure gold, Rev. xxi. 18. But the builders of the gospel church said, Silver and gold have we none; and yet the glory of their building far exceeded that of the tabernacle, 2 Cor. iii. 10, 11. How much better is wisdom than gold! No orders are given here about the floor of the tabernacle; probably that also was boarded; for we cannot think that within all these fine curtains they trod upon the cold or wet ground; if it was so left, it may remind us of ch. xx. 24, An altar of earth shalt thou make unto me.
31 And thou shalt make a vail of blue, and purple, and scarlet, and fine twined linen of cunning work: with cherubims shall it be made: 32 And thou shalt hang it upon four pillars of shittim wood overlaid with gold: their hooks shall be of gold, upon the four sockets of silver. 33 And thou shalt hang up the vail under the taches, that thou mayest bring in thither within the vail the ark of the testimony: and the vail shall divide unto you between the holy place and the most holy. 34 And thou shalt put the mercy seat upon the ark of the testimony in the most holy place. 35 And thou shalt set the table without the vail, and the candlestick over against the table on the side of the tabernacle toward the south: and thou shalt put the table on the north side. 36 And thou shalt make an hanging for the door of the tent, of blue, and purple, and scarlet, and fine twined linen, wrought with needlework. 37 And thou shalt make for the hanging five pillars of shittim wood, and overlay them with gold, and their hooks shall be of gold: and thou shalt cast five sockets of brass for them.
Two veils are here ordered to be made, 1. One for a partition between the holy place and the most holy, which not only forbade any to enter, but forbade them so much as to look into the holiest of all, v. 31, 33. Under that dispensation, divine grace was veiled, but now we behold it with open face, 2 Cor. iii. 18. The apostle tells us (Heb. ix. 8, 9) what was the meaning of this veil; it intimated that the ceremonial law could not make the comers thereunto perfect, nor would the observance of it bring men to heaven; the way into the holiest of all was not made manifest while the first tabernacle was standing; life and immortality lay concealed till they were brought to light by the gospel, which was therefore signified by the rending of this veil at the death of Christ, Matt. xxvii. 51. We have not boldness to enter into the holiest, in all acts of devotion, by the blood of Jesus, yet such as obliges us to a holy reverence and a humble sense of our distance. 2. Another veil was for the outer door of the tabernacle, v. 36, 37. Through this first veil the priests went in every day to minister in the holy place, but not the people, Heb. ix. 6. This veil, which was all the defence the tabernacle had against thieves and robbers, might easily be broken through, for it could be neither locked nor barred, and the abundance of wealth in the tabernacle, one would think, might be a temptation; but by leaving it thus exposed, (1.) The priests and Levites would be so much the more obliged to keep a strict watch upon it, and, (2.) God would show his care of his church on earth, though it is weak and defenceless, and continually exposed. A curtain shall be (if God please to make it so) as strong a defence to his house as gates of brass and bars of iron.
Adam Clarke: Commentary on the Bible - 1831
26:1: Thou shalt make the tabernacle - משכן mischan, from שכן shachan, to dwell, means simply a dwelling place or habitation of any kind, but here it means the dwelling place of Jehovah, who, as a king in his camp, had his dwelling or pavilion among his people, his table always spread, his lamps lighted, and the priests, etc., his attendants, always in waiting. From the minute and accurate description here given, a good workman, had he the same materials, might make a perfect facsimile of the ancient Jewish tabernacle. It was a movable building, and so constructed that it might be easily taken to pieces, for the greater convenience of carriage, as they were often obliged to transport it from place to place, in their various journeyings. For the twined linen, blue, purple, and scarlet, see Clarke's note on Exo 25:4, etc.
Cherubims - See Clarke's note on Exo 25:18.
Cunning work - חשב chosheb probably means a sort of diaper, in which the figures appear equally perfect on both sides; this was probably formed in the loom. Another kind of curious work is mentioned, Exo 26:36, רקם rokem, which we term needle-work; this was probably similar to our embroidery, tapestry, or cloth of arras. It has been thought unlikely that these curious works were all manufactured in the wilderness: what was done in the loom, they might have brought with them from Egypt; what could be done by hand, without the use of complex machinery, the Israelitish women could readily perform with their needles, during their stay in the wilderness. But still it seems probable that they brought even their looms with them. The whole of this account shows that not only necessary but ornamental arts had been carried to a considerable pitch of perfection, both among the Israelites and Egyptians.
The inner curtains of the tabernacle were ten in number, and each in length twenty-eight cubits, and four in breadth; about sixteen yards twelve inches long, and two yards twelve inches broad. The curtains were to be coupled together, five and five of a side, by fifty loops, Exo 26:5, and as many golden clasps, Exo 26:6, so that each might look like one curtain, and the whole make one entire covering, which was the first.
Albert Barnes: Notes on the Bible - 1834
26:1: (Compare Exo. 36:8-33.) The tabernacle was to comprise three main parts, the tabernacle Exo 26:1-6, more strictly so-called, its tent Exo 26:7-13, and its covering Exo 26:14 (Compare Exo 35:11; Exo 39:33-34; Exo 40:19, Exo 40:34; Num 3:25, etc.). These parts are very clearly distinguished in the Hebrew, but they are confounded in many places of the English Version (see Exo 26:7, Exo 26:9, etc.). The tabernacle itself was to consist of curtains of fine linen woven with colored figures of cherubim, and a structure of boards which was to contain the holy place and the most holy place; the tent was to be a true tent of goats' hair cloth to contain and shelter the tabernacle: the covering was to be of red rams' skins and "tachash" skins Exo 25:5, and was spread over the goats' hair tent as an additional protection against the weather. On the external form of the tabernacle and the arrangement of its parts, see cuts at the end of the chapter.

26:1
The tabernacle - The משׁכן mı̂ shkâ n, i. e. the dwelling-place; the definite article regularly accompanies the Hebrew word when the dwelling-place of Yahweh is denoted. But in this place the word is not used in its full sense as denoting the dwelling-place of Yahweh: it denotes only the tabernacle-cloth Exo 26:6. The word is, in fact, employed with three distinct ranges of meaning,
(1) in its strict sense, comprising the cloth of the tabernacle with its woodwork (Exo 25:9; Exo 26:30; Exo 36:13; Exo 40:18, etc.);
(2) in a narrower sense, for the tabernacle-cloth only (Exo 26:1, Exo 26:6; Exo 35:11; Exo 39:33-34, etc.);
(3) in a wider sense, for the tabernacle with its tent and covering (Exo 27:19; Exo 35:18, etc.).
With ten curtains - Rather, of ten breadths. Five of these breadths were united so as to form what, in common usage, we should call a large curtain Exo 26:3. The two curtains thus formed were coupled together by the loops and taches to make the entire tabernacle-cloth Exo 26:6.
Of cunning work - More properly, of the work of the skilled weaver. The colored figures of cherubim (see Exo 25:4, Exo 25:18) were to be worked in the loom, as in the manufacture of tapestry and carpets (see Exo 26:36 note). On the different kinds of workmen employed on the textile fabrics, see Exo 35:35.

R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
26:1: the tabernacle with ten curtains: The word mishcan, from shachan, to dwell, means simply a dwelling-place, or habitation. "When God had brought the children of Israel out of Egypt," says the very learned Dr. Cudworth, "resolving to manifest himself in a peculiar manner present among them, he thought good to dwell amongst them in a visible and external manner; and therefore, while they were in the wilderness, and sojourned in tents, he would have a tent or tabernacle built, to sojourn with them also. - Now, the tabernacle being thus a house for God to dwell in visibly, to make up the notion of dwelling or habitation complete, there must be all things suitable to a house belonging to it. Hence, in the holy place, there must be a table and a candlestick, because these were the ordinary furniture of a room. The table must have its dishes, and spoons, and bowls, and covers, belonging to it, though they were never used; and always be furnished with bread upon it. The candlestick must have its lamps continually burning, etc." Exo 25:8, Exo 36:8-19, Exo 40:2, Exo 40:17-19; Ch1 17:1, Ch1 21:29; Joh 1:14, Joh 2:21; Heb 8:2; Heb 9:9, Heb 9:23, Heb 9:24; Rev 21:3
fine twined linen: Exo 26:36, Exo 25:4, Exo 35:6, Exo 35:35; Rev 19:8
cherubims: Exo 25:18
cunning work: Heb. the work of a cunning workman, or embroiderer
Carl Friedrich Keil and Franz Delitzsch
26:1
(cf. Ex 36:8-38). The Dwelling-Place. - This was to be formed of a framework of wood, and of tapestry and curtains. The description commences with the tapestry or tent-cloth (Ex 26:1-14), which made the framework (vv. 15-30) into a dwelling. The inner lining is mentioned first (Ex 26:1-6), because this made the dwelling into a tent (tabernacle). This inner tent-cloth was to consist of ten curtains (יריעת, αὐλαίαι), or, as Luther has more aptly rendered it, Teppiche, pieces of tapestry, i.e., of cloth composed of byssus yarn, hyacinth, purple, and scarlet. משׁזר twisted, signifies yarn composed of various colours twisted together, from which the finer kinds of byssus, for which the Egyptians were so celebrated, were made (vid., Hengstenberg, Egypt, pp. 139ff.). The byssus yarn was of a clear white, and this was woven into mixed cloth by combination with dark blue, and dark and fiery red. It was not to be in simple stripes or checks, however; but the variegated yarn was to be woven (embroidered) into the white byssus, so as to form artistic figures of cherubim ("cherubim, work of the artistic weaver, shalt thou make it"). חשׁב מעשׂה (lit., work or labour of the thinker) is applied to artistic weaving, in which either figures or gold threads (Ex 28:6, Ex 28:8, Ex 28:15) are worked into the cloth, and which is to be distinguished from רקם מעשׂה variegated weaving (Ex 26:36).
Geneva 1599
26:1 Moreover thou shalt make the tabernacle [with] ten curtains [of] fine twined linen, and blue, and purple, and scarlet: [with] cherubims of (a) cunning work shalt thou make them.
(a) That is, of most cunning or fine work.
John Gill
26:1 Moreover, thou shalt make the tabernacle,.... Which he was ordered to make before, the pattern of which was shown him in the mount: this was an habitation for God to dwell in, as the word properly signifies, and into which the furniture before described was to be put; this tabernacle was a type both of the human nature of Christ, which is the true tabernacle which God pitched, and not man, the greater and more perfect one, Heb 8:2 in which the fulness of the Godhead dwells bodily, where the glory of God is seen, in whom he grants his gracious presence to his people, and accepts of them and their sacrifices of prayer and praise; and also of the church of God, Ps 43:3. Here Jehovah dwells, grants his presence to his people, and comes and blesses them; here he is worshipped, and spiritual sacrifices are offered up to him with acceptance: the tabernacle of Moses was made
with ten curtains of fine twined linen, and blue, and purple, and scarlet; the ground of these curtains was fine linen, twined or doubled: and the Jewish writers, as Maimonides, Ben Gersom, and others, say it was six times doubled, the word "Shesh", here used, signifying six; and this was interwoven with threads of yarn dyed blue, purple, and scarlet; according to Jarchi, the threads of which this tapestry was made were twenty four times doubled: he observes,"there were four sorts in every thread, one thread of fine linen, and three of wool, and every thread was doubled six times; lo, the four sorts, when they were twined together, there were twenty four double to a thread;''which if so, must make a stuff of a very great consistence and stiffness. This, as applied to the human nature of Christ, the fine linen may denote the purity of it; the various colours the different graces of the Spirit, with which it is adorned; or else the wounds, bruises, bloodshed, sufferings and death he endured in it: as applied to the church, may signify the clothing of the saints with the righteousness of Christ, that fine linen clean and white, and their being washed in his precious blood, and beautified with the graces of his Spirit:
with cherubim of cunning work shall thou make them; that is, with figures like those of the cherubim on the mercy seat, so disposed by the curious art and contrivance of the weaver, as to appear on both sides of this tapestry; for this was not wrought by a needle, which only shows the figure on one side, but by weaving, as Jarchi observes; and who says, that there was one figure on one side, and another on another; as, for instance, a lion on one side, and an eagle on the other; or, which is more likely, the same figure was seen on both sides, as Maimonides affirms, who says (e), the work called Chosheb (which is what is here spoken of) is that whose figures appear on both sides, before and behind: this in the mystical sense may point either to the ministration of angels to Christ in his human nature, and to his people the heirs of salvation; or else to the service of Gospel ministers, done for the honour and glory of Christ, and the good of his church and people: Josephus (f) thinks these curtains had a mystical meaning in them, and represent the nature of the elements, and so Philo (g).
(e) Hilchot Cele Hamikdash, c. 8. sect. 15. (f) Antiqu. l. 3. c. 7. sect. 7. (g) De Vita Mosis, l. 3. p. 667.
John Wesley
26:1 The curtains were to be embroidered with cherubim, to intimate that the angels of God pitched their tents round about the church, Ps 34:7. As there were cherubim over the mercy - seat, so there were round the tabernacle. There were to be two hangings, five breadths to each, sewed together, and the two hangings coupled together with golden clasps or tacks, so that it might be all one tabernacle, Ex 26:6. Thus the churches of Christ, though they are many, yet are one, being fitly joined together in holy love and by the unity of the Spirit, so growing into one holy temple in the Lord. This tabernacle was very strait and narrow, but at the preaching of the gospel, the church is bid to enlarge the place of her tent, and to stretch forth her curtains, Is 54:2.
Robert Jamieson, A. R. Fausset and David Brown
26:1 TEN CURTAINS (Exo. 26:1-37)
cunning work--that is, of elegant texture, richly embroidered. The word "cunning," in old English, is synonymous with "skilful."
26:226:2: Երկայնութիւն միոյ փեղկին ՚ի քսանեւյութ կանգնոյ, եւ լայնութիւն ՚ի չորից կանգնոց փեղկի միոյ լինիցի։ չափ՝ նո՛յն եղիցի ամենայն փեղկիցն[723]։ [723] Ոմանք. Եղիցի ամենայն փեղկացն։
2 Վարագոյրի ամէն շերտի երկարութիւնը պէտք է լինի քսանութ կանգուն, իսկ լայնութիւնը՝ չորս կանգուն: Բոլոր շերտերի չափսը նոյնը պէտք է լինի:
2 Մէկ վարագոյրին երկայնութիւնը քսանըութը կանգուն եւ մէկ վարագոյրին լայնութիւնը չորս կանգուն պէտք է ըլլայ։ Բոլոր վարագոյրներուն չափը նոյնը պէտք է ըլլայ։
Երկայնութիւն միոյ փեղկին ի քսան եւ յութ կանգնոյ, եւ լայնութիւն ի չորից կանգնոց փեղկի միոյ լինիցի. չափ` նոյն եղիցի ամենայն փեղկիցն:

26:2: Երկայնութիւն միոյ փեղկին ՚ի քսանեւյութ կանգնոյ, եւ լայնութիւն ՚ի չորից կանգնոց փեղկի միոյ լինիցի։ չափ՝ նո՛յն եղիցի ամենայն փեղկիցն[723]։
[723] Ոմանք. Եղիցի ամենայն փեղկացն։
2 Վարագոյրի ամէն շերտի երկարութիւնը պէտք է լինի քսանութ կանգուն, իսկ լայնութիւնը՝ չորս կանգուն: Բոլոր շերտերի չափսը նոյնը պէտք է լինի:
2 Մէկ վարագոյրին երկայնութիւնը քսանըութը կանգուն եւ մէկ վարագոյրին լայնութիւնը չորս կանգուն պէտք է ըլլայ։ Բոլոր վարագոյրներուն չափը նոյնը պէտք է ըլլայ։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
26:22: длина каждого покрывала двадцать восемь локтей, а ширина каждого покрывала четыре локтя: мера одна всем покрывалам.
26:2 μῆκος μηκος length τῆς ο the αὐλαίας αυλαια the μιᾶς εις.1 one; unit ὀκτὼ οκτω eight καὶ και and; even εἴκοσι εικοσι twenty πήχεων πηχυς forearm; foot and a half καὶ και and; even εὖρος ευρος four πήχεων πηχυς forearm; foot and a half ἡ ο the αὐλαία αυλαια the μία εις.1 one; unit ἔσται ειμι be μέτρον μετρον measure τὸ ο the αὐτὸ αυτος he; him ἔσται ειμι be πάσαις πας all; every ταῖς ο the αὐλαίαις αυλαια curtain
26:2 אֹ֣רֶךְ׀ ʔˈōreḵ אֹרֶךְ length הַ ha הַ the יְרִיעָ֣ה yᵊrîʕˈā יְרִיעָה curtain הָֽ hˈā הַ the אַחַ֗ת ʔaḥˈaṯ אֶחָד one שְׁמֹנֶ֤ה šᵊmōnˈeh שְׁמֹנֶה eight וְ wᵊ וְ and עֶשְׂרִים֙ ʕeśrîm עֶשְׂרִים twenty בָּֽ bˈā בְּ in † הַ the אַמָּ֔ה ʔammˈā אַמָּה cubit וְ wᵊ וְ and רֹ֨חַב֙ rˈōḥav רֹחַב breadth אַרְבַּ֣ע ʔarbˈaʕ אַרְבַּע four בָּ bā בְּ in † הַ the אַמָּ֔ה ʔammˈā אַמָּה cubit הַ ha הַ the יְרִיעָ֖ה yᵊrîʕˌā יְרִיעָה curtain הָ hā הַ the אֶחָ֑ת ʔeḥˈāṯ אֶחָד one מִדָּ֥ה middˌā מִדָּה measured stretch אַחַ֖ת ʔaḥˌaṯ אֶחָד one לְ lᵊ לְ to כָל־ ḵol- כֹּל whole הַ ha הַ the יְרִיעֹֽת׃ yᵊrîʕˈōṯ יְרִיעָה curtain
26:2. longitudo cortinae unius habebit viginti octo cubitos latitudo quattuor cubitorum erit unius mensurae fient universa tentoriaThe length of one curtain shall be twenty-eight cubits; the breadth shall be four cubits. All the curtains shall be of one measure.
2. The length of each curtain shall be eight and twenty cubits, and the breadth of each curtain four cubits: all the curtains shall have one measure.
The length of one curtain [shall be] eight and twenty cubits, and the breadth of one curtain four cubits: and every one of the curtains shall have one measure:

2: длина каждого покрывала двадцать восемь локтей, а ширина каждого покрывала четыре локтя: мера одна всем покрывалам.
26:2
μῆκος μηκος length
τῆς ο the
αὐλαίας αυλαια the
μιᾶς εις.1 one; unit
ὀκτὼ οκτω eight
καὶ και and; even
εἴκοσι εικοσι twenty
πήχεων πηχυς forearm; foot and a half
καὶ και and; even
εὖρος ευρος four
πήχεων πηχυς forearm; foot and a half
ο the
αὐλαία αυλαια the
μία εις.1 one; unit
ἔσται ειμι be
μέτρον μετρον measure
τὸ ο the
αὐτὸ αυτος he; him
ἔσται ειμι be
πάσαις πας all; every
ταῖς ο the
αὐλαίαις αυλαια curtain
26:2
אֹ֣רֶךְ׀ ʔˈōreḵ אֹרֶךְ length
הַ ha הַ the
יְרִיעָ֣ה yᵊrîʕˈā יְרִיעָה curtain
הָֽ hˈā הַ the
אַחַ֗ת ʔaḥˈaṯ אֶחָד one
שְׁמֹנֶ֤ה šᵊmōnˈeh שְׁמֹנֶה eight
וְ wᵊ וְ and
עֶשְׂרִים֙ ʕeśrîm עֶשְׂרִים twenty
בָּֽ bˈā בְּ in
הַ the
אַמָּ֔ה ʔammˈā אַמָּה cubit
וְ wᵊ וְ and
רֹ֨חַב֙ rˈōḥav רֹחַב breadth
אַרְבַּ֣ע ʔarbˈaʕ אַרְבַּע four
בָּ בְּ in
הַ the
אַמָּ֔ה ʔammˈā אַמָּה cubit
הַ ha הַ the
יְרִיעָ֖ה yᵊrîʕˌā יְרִיעָה curtain
הָ הַ the
אֶחָ֑ת ʔeḥˈāṯ אֶחָד one
מִדָּ֥ה middˌā מִדָּה measured stretch
אַחַ֖ת ʔaḥˌaṯ אֶחָד one
לְ lᵊ לְ to
כָל־ ḵol- כֹּל whole
הַ ha הַ the
יְרִיעֹֽת׃ yᵊrîʕˈōṯ יְרִיעָה curtain
26:2. longitudo cortinae unius habebit viginti octo cubitos latitudo quattuor cubitorum erit unius mensurae fient universa tentoria
The length of one curtain shall be twenty-eight cubits; the breadth shall be four cubits. All the curtains shall be of one measure.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jfb▾ jg▾ kad▾ tr▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
2-3: Подобно тому как стены скинии слагались из отдельных брусьев, и покров скинии состоял из десяти отдельных полос, имевших каждая 28: локтей длины и 4: локтя ширины. Эти отдельные узкие полосы были затем сшиты вместе, — образовали два больших полотнища, причем каждое состояло из пяти полос.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
26:2: curtain: Exo 26:7, Exo 26:8; Num 4:25; Sa2 7:2; Ch1 17:1
Carl Friedrich Keil and Franz Delitzsch
26:2
The length of each piece was to be 28 cubits, and the breadth 4 cubits, one measure for all; and five of these pieces were to be "joined together one to another," i.e., joined or sewed together into a piece of 28 cubits in length and 20 in breadth, and the same with the other five.
John Gill
26:2 The length of one curtain shall be twenty eight cubits,.... Or fourteen yards:
and the breadth of one curtain four cubits; or two yards; according to the common notion of a cubit being half a yard; but if, as Dr. Cumberland says, the Jewish and Egyptian cubit was three inches longer, this will make a considerable difference in the length and breadth of those curtains, especially in the former:
and everyone of the curtains shall have one measure; be of equal length and breadth.
Robert Jamieson, A. R. Fausset and David Brown
26:2 length--Each curtain was to be fifteen yards in length and a little exceeding two in breadth.
26:326:3: Հի՛նգ փեղկ ընդ միմեանս կցեալ. եւ հինգ եւս ա՛յլ ընդ միմեանս խառնեալ։
3 Հինգ շերտերը պէտք է միացած լինեն իրար: Իրար պէտք է միացած լինեն նաեւ միւս հինգ շերտերը:
3 Հինգ վարագոյրները իրարու թող կցուին եւ միւս հինգ վարագոյրները՝ իրարու։
Հինգ փեղկ ընդ միմեանս կցեալ, եւ հինգ եւս այլ ընդ միմեանս խառնեալ:

26:3: Հի՛նգ փեղկ ընդ միմեանս կցեալ. եւ հինգ եւս ա՛յլ ընդ միմեանս խառնեալ։
3 Հինգ շերտերը պէտք է միացած լինեն իրար: Իրար պէտք է միացած լինեն նաեւ միւս հինգ շերտերը:
3 Հինգ վարագոյրները իրարու թող կցուին եւ միւս հինգ վարագոյրները՝ իրարու։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
26:33: Пять покрывал пусть будут соединены одно с другим, и [другие] пять покрывал соединены одно с другим.
26:3 πέντε πεντε five δὲ δε though; while αὐλαῖαι αυλαια be ἐξ εκ from; out of ἀλλήλων αλληλων one another ἐχόμεναι εχω have; hold ἡ ο the ἑτέρα ετερος different; alternate ἐκ εκ from; out of τῆς ο the ἑτέρας ετερος different; alternate καὶ και and; even πέντε πεντε five αὐλαῖαι αυλαια be συνεχόμεναι συνεχω block up / in; confine ἑτέρα ετερος different; alternate τῇ ο the ἑτέρᾳ ετερος different; alternate
26:3 חֲמֵ֣שׁ ḥᵃmˈēš חָמֵשׁ five הַ ha הַ the יְרִיעֹ֗ת yᵊrîʕˈōṯ יְרִיעָה curtain תִּֽהְיֶ֨יןָ֙ tˈihyˈeʸnā היה be חֹֽבְרֹ֔ת ḥˈōvᵊrˈōṯ חבר be united אִשָּׁ֖ה ʔiššˌā אִשָּׁה woman אֶל־ ʔel- אֶל to אֲחֹתָ֑הּ ʔᵃḥōṯˈāh אָחֹות sister וְ wᵊ וְ and חָמֵ֤שׁ ḥāmˈēš חָמֵשׁ five יְרִיעֹת֙ yᵊrîʕˌōṯ יְרִיעָה curtain חֹֽבְרֹ֔ת ḥˈōvᵊrˈōṯ חבר be united אִשָּׁ֖ה ʔiššˌā אִשָּׁה woman אֶל־ ʔel- אֶל to אֲחֹתָֽהּ׃ ʔᵃḥōṯˈāh אָחֹות sister
26:3. quinque cortinae sibi iungentur mutuo et aliae quinque nexu simili coherebuntFive curtains shall be joined one to another, and the other five shall be coupled together in like manner.
3. Five curtains shall be coupled together one to another; and five curtains shall be coupled one to another.
The five curtains shall be coupled together one to another; and [other] five curtains [shall be] coupled one to another:

3: Пять покрывал пусть будут соединены одно с другим, и [другие] пять покрывал соединены одно с другим.
26:3
πέντε πεντε five
δὲ δε though; while
αὐλαῖαι αυλαια be
ἐξ εκ from; out of
ἀλλήλων αλληλων one another
ἐχόμεναι εχω have; hold
ο the
ἑτέρα ετερος different; alternate
ἐκ εκ from; out of
τῆς ο the
ἑτέρας ετερος different; alternate
καὶ και and; even
πέντε πεντε five
αὐλαῖαι αυλαια be
συνεχόμεναι συνεχω block up / in; confine
ἑτέρα ετερος different; alternate
τῇ ο the
ἑτέρᾳ ετερος different; alternate
26:3
חֲמֵ֣שׁ ḥᵃmˈēš חָמֵשׁ five
הַ ha הַ the
יְרִיעֹ֗ת yᵊrîʕˈōṯ יְרִיעָה curtain
תִּֽהְיֶ֨יןָ֙ tˈihyˈeʸnā היה be
חֹֽבְרֹ֔ת ḥˈōvᵊrˈōṯ חבר be united
אִשָּׁ֖ה ʔiššˌā אִשָּׁה woman
אֶל־ ʔel- אֶל to
אֲחֹתָ֑הּ ʔᵃḥōṯˈāh אָחֹות sister
וְ wᵊ וְ and
חָמֵ֤שׁ ḥāmˈēš חָמֵשׁ five
יְרִיעֹת֙ yᵊrîʕˌōṯ יְרִיעָה curtain
חֹֽבְרֹ֔ת ḥˈōvᵊrˈōṯ חבר be united
אִשָּׁ֖ה ʔiššˌā אִשָּׁה woman
אֶל־ ʔel- אֶל to
אֲחֹתָֽהּ׃ ʔᵃḥōṯˈāh אָחֹות sister
26:3. quinque cortinae sibi iungentur mutuo et aliae quinque nexu simili coherebunt
Five curtains shall be joined one to another, and the other five shall be coupled together in like manner.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jfb▾ jg▾ tr▾ ab▾ all ▾
Albert Barnes: Notes on the Bible - 1834
26:3
Each curtain formed of five breadths (see Exo 26:1), was 42 feet in length and 30 feet in breadth, taking the cubit at 18 inches.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
26:3: coupled together: Exo 26:9, Exo 36:10; Joh 17:21; Co1 12:4, Co1 12-27; Eph 2:21, Eph 2:22, Eph 4:3-6, Eph 4:16; Col 2:2, Col 2:19
John Gill
26:3 The five curtains shall be coupled together one to another,.... Five of the ten curtains were to be sewed together, and make as it were one curtain:
and other five curtains shall be coupled one to another: the other five were to be joined together in like manner, and so made two large pieces of tapestry of fourteen yards long and ten broad, according to the common account of a cubit, but were much longer and broader.
Robert Jamieson, A. R. Fausset and David Brown
26:3 The five curtains shall be coupled together one to another, &c.--so as to form two grand divisions, each eleven yards wide.
26:426:4: Եւ արասցես ճարմա՛նդս կապուտակեայս առ եզերբ միոյ փեղկին ՚ի միոջէ կողմանէ ՚ի խառնուածսն։ նոյնպէս արասցես եւ առ եզե՛րբ արտաքնոյ փեղկին, երկրորդի՛ խառնուածոյն։
4 Շերտերի կցուածքի մի կողմից մէկ շերտի եզերքին կապոյտ ճարմանդներ պէտք է դնես: Նոյնը պէտք է անես նաեւ երկրորդ կցուածքի արտաքին շերտի եզերքին:
4 Կցուածքին ծայրի մէկ վարագոյրին եզերքին վրայ կապուտակեայ օղակներ շինէ՛. միւս կցուածքին ծայրի վարագոյրին եզերքն ալ նոյնպէս։
Եւ արասցես ճարմանդս կապուտակեայս առ եզերբ միոյ փեղկին ի միոջէ կողմանէ ի խառնուածս. նոյնպէս արասցես եւ առ եզերբ արտաքնոյ փեղկին, երկրորդի խառնուածոյն:

26:4: Եւ արասցես ճարմա՛նդս կապուտակեայս առ եզերբ միոյ փեղկին ՚ի միոջէ կողմանէ ՚ի խառնուածսն։ նոյնպէս արասցես եւ առ եզե՛րբ արտաքնոյ փեղկին, երկրորդի՛ խառնուածոյն։
4 Շերտերի կցուածքի մի կողմից մէկ շերտի եզերքին կապոյտ ճարմանդներ պէտք է դնես: Նոյնը պէտք է անես նաեւ երկրորդ կցուածքի արտաքին շերտի եզերքին:
4 Կցուածքին ծայրի մէկ վարագոյրին եզերքին վրայ կապուտակեայ օղակներ շինէ՛. միւս կցուածքին ծայրի վարագոյրին եզերքն ալ նոյնպէս։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
26:44: Сделай петли голубого [цвета] на краю первого покрывала, в конце соединяющего обе половины; так сделай и на краю последнего покрывала, соединяющего обе половины;
26:4 καὶ και and; even ποιήσεις ποιεω do; make αὐταῖς αυτος he; him ἀγκύλας αγκυλη hyacinth blue ἐπὶ επι in; on τοῦ ο the χείλους χειλος lip; shore τῆς ο the αὐλαίας αυλαια the μιᾶς εις.1 one; unit ἐκ εκ from; out of τοῦ ο the ἑνὸς εις.1 one; unit μέρους μερος part; in particular εἰς εις into; for τὴν ο the συμβολὴν συμβολη and; even οὕτως ουτως so; this way ποιήσεις ποιεω do; make ἐπὶ επι in; on τοῦ ο the χείλους χειλος lip; shore τῆς ο the αὐλαίας αυλαια the ἐξωτέρας εξωτερος outer πρὸς προς to; toward τῇ ο the συμβολῇ συμβολη the δευτέρᾳ δευτερος second
26:4 וְ wᵊ וְ and עָשִׂ֜יתָ ʕāśˈîṯā עשׂה make לֻֽלְאֹ֣ת lˈulʔˈōṯ לֻלָאֹת loops תְּכֵ֗לֶת tᵊḵˈēleṯ תְּכֵלֶת purple wool עַ֣ל ʕˈal עַל upon שְׂפַ֤ת śᵊfˈaṯ שָׂפָה lip הַ ha הַ the יְרִיעָה֙ yᵊrîʕˌā יְרִיעָה curtain הָ hā הַ the אֶחָ֔ת ʔeḥˈāṯ אֶחָד one מִ mi מִן from קָּצָ֖ה qqāṣˌā קָצָה end בַּ ba בְּ in † הַ the חֹבָ֑רֶת ḥōvˈāreṯ חֹבֶרֶת drapery וְ wᵊ וְ and כֵ֤ן ḵˈēn כֵּן thus תַּעֲשֶׂה֙ taʕᵃśˌeh עשׂה make בִּ bi בְּ in שְׂפַ֣ת śᵊfˈaṯ שָׂפָה lip הַ ha הַ the יְרִיעָ֔ה yᵊrîʕˈā יְרִיעָה curtain הַ ha הַ the קִּ֣יצֹונָ֔ה qqˈîṣônˈā קִיצֹון outermost בַּ ba בְּ in † הַ the מַּחְבֶּ֖רֶת mmaḥbˌereṯ מַחְבֶּרֶת junction הַ ha הַ the שֵּׁנִֽית׃ ššēnˈîṯ שֵׁנִי second
26:4. ansulas hyacinthinas in lateribus ac summitatibus facies cortinarum ut possint invicem copulariThou shalt make loops of violet in the sides and tops of the curtains, that they may be joined one to another.
4. And thou shalt make loops of blue upon the edge of the one curtain from the selvedge in the coupling; and likewise shalt thou make in the edge of the curtain that is outmost in the second coupling.
And thou shalt make loops of blue upon the edge of the one curtain from the selvedge in the coupling; and likewise shalt thou make in the uttermost edge of [another] curtain, in the coupling of the second:

4: Сделай петли голубого [цвета] на краю первого покрывала, в конце соединяющего обе половины; так сделай и на краю последнего покрывала, соединяющего обе половины;
26:4
καὶ και and; even
ποιήσεις ποιεω do; make
αὐταῖς αυτος he; him
ἀγκύλας αγκυλη hyacinth blue
ἐπὶ επι in; on
τοῦ ο the
χείλους χειλος lip; shore
τῆς ο the
αὐλαίας αυλαια the
μιᾶς εις.1 one; unit
ἐκ εκ from; out of
τοῦ ο the
ἑνὸς εις.1 one; unit
μέρους μερος part; in particular
εἰς εις into; for
τὴν ο the
συμβολὴν συμβολη and; even
οὕτως ουτως so; this way
ποιήσεις ποιεω do; make
ἐπὶ επι in; on
τοῦ ο the
χείλους χειλος lip; shore
τῆς ο the
αὐλαίας αυλαια the
ἐξωτέρας εξωτερος outer
πρὸς προς to; toward
τῇ ο the
συμβολῇ συμβολη the
δευτέρᾳ δευτερος second
26:4
וְ wᵊ וְ and
עָשִׂ֜יתָ ʕāśˈîṯā עשׂה make
לֻֽלְאֹ֣ת lˈulʔˈōṯ לֻלָאֹת loops
תְּכֵ֗לֶת tᵊḵˈēleṯ תְּכֵלֶת purple wool
עַ֣ל ʕˈal עַל upon
שְׂפַ֤ת śᵊfˈaṯ שָׂפָה lip
הַ ha הַ the
יְרִיעָה֙ yᵊrîʕˌā יְרִיעָה curtain
הָ הַ the
אֶחָ֔ת ʔeḥˈāṯ אֶחָד one
מִ mi מִן from
קָּצָ֖ה qqāṣˌā קָצָה end
בַּ ba בְּ in
הַ the
חֹבָ֑רֶת ḥōvˈāreṯ חֹבֶרֶת drapery
וְ wᵊ וְ and
כֵ֤ן ḵˈēn כֵּן thus
תַּעֲשֶׂה֙ taʕᵃśˌeh עשׂה make
בִּ bi בְּ in
שְׂפַ֣ת śᵊfˈaṯ שָׂפָה lip
הַ ha הַ the
יְרִיעָ֔ה yᵊrîʕˈā יְרִיעָה curtain
הַ ha הַ the
קִּ֣יצֹונָ֔ה qqˈîṣônˈā קִיצֹון outermost
בַּ ba בְּ in
הַ the
מַּחְבֶּ֖רֶת mmaḥbˌereṯ מַחְבֶּרֶת junction
הַ ha הַ the
שֵּׁנִֽית׃ ššēnˈîṯ שֵׁנִי second
26:4. ansulas hyacinthinas in lateribus ac summitatibus facies cortinarum ut possint invicem copulari
Thou shalt make loops of violet in the sides and tops of the curtains, that they may be joined one to another.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jg▾ gnv▾ kad▾ tr▾ ab▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
4-6: Образовавшиеся таким образом две большие полосы, по 28: локтей в длину и 20: локтей в ширину, уже не сшивались, но соединялись при помощи 100: голубых петлей, расположенных по 50: в той и другой полосе, петля против петли, и соединенных 50-ю золотыми крючками. По соединении указанным способом обеих половин, получался один покров в 28: локтей длины и 40: ширины. Имевший такие размеры, покров налагался на брусья стен скинии таким образом, что его ширина (40: локтей) приходилась на длину всего здания и на заднюю западную стену. Именно одна половина покрова своей 20-локтевой шириной покрывала двадцать локтей святилища, десять локтей второй покрывали святое святых и остальные десять шли на западную сторону, имевшую в высоту именно десять локтей (ст. 16). Право на подобное понимание даст 33: ст.; из его указания, что завеса, разделяющая святое святых от святилища, висела как раз под крючками, соединявшими две половины покрова по 20: локтей каждая, с несомненностью следует, что первые двадцать локтей покрывали пространство до святого святых, т. е. святилище. И так как скиния имела в длину 30: локтей (ст. 16: и 18), то на длину святого святых требовалось из остальных 20: локтей покрывала лишь десять локтей. Остающиеся десять закрывали заднюю сторону не до самой земли, так как из них нужно вычесть ту часть, которая приходилась на толщину брусьев. Своей длиной нижний покров покрывал ширину скинии. Но так как его длина равнялась 28: локтям, а ширина скинии, считая 10: локтей верха и 20: локтей до высоты двух боковых сторон, равнялась 30: локтям, то и в северном, и южном боках, как и на западной стороне, он не достигал до земли более, чем на локоть: и в этом случае часть недостающих двух локтей шла на толщину брусьев. Это явление было не случайное, а намеренное: не следовало ткани с изображением херувимов спускаться до самой земли и пылиться.
Albert Barnes: Notes on the Bible - 1834
26:4
The meaning appears to be, "And thou shalt make loops of blue on the edge of the one breadth (which is) on the side (of the one curtain) at the coupling; and the same shalt thou do in the edge of the outside breadth of the other (curtain) at the coupling." The "coupling" is the uniting together of the two curtains: ("selvedge" is the translation of a word signifying extremity or end).
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
26:4: loops of blue: Exo 26:5, Exo 26:10, Exo 26:11, Exo 36:11, Exo 36:12, Exo 36:17
Carl Friedrich Keil and Franz Delitzsch
26:4
They were also to make 50 hyacinth loops "on the border of the one piece of tapestry, from the end in the join," i.e., on the extreme edge of the five pieces that were sewed together; and the same "on the border of the last piece in the second joined tapestry." Thus there were to be fifty loops in each of the two large pieces, and these loops were to be מקבּילת "taking up the loops one the other;" that is to say, they were to be so made that the loops in the two pieces should exactly meet.
Geneva 1599
26:4 And thou shalt make loops of blue upon the edge of the one curtain from the selvedge (b) in the coupling; and likewise shalt thou make in the uttermost edge of [another] curtain, in the coupling of the second.
(b) On the side that the curtains might be tied together.
John Gill
26:4 And thou shall make loops of blue upon the edge of the one curtain,.... The first large curtain, consisting of five sewed together, at the edge of that:
from the selvedge in the coupling; where it was to be coupled with the other great curtain; "loops" or "eyelet holes" (h), were to be made: these were not wove with the curtains, for they were not to be upon all of them, only at the two outermost of the largest ones, and therefore were made afterwards, probably with the needle:
and likewise shall thou make in the uppermost edge of another curtain, in the coupling of the second; loops also were to be made on the outermost edge of another curtain belonging to the second great curtain, where it was to be coupled with the first.
(h) "ocellos", Vatablus.
26:526:5: Յիսո՛ւն ճարմանդ արասցես միում փեղկի. եւ յիսուն ճարմանդ արասցես ՚ի կողմանէ փեղկին ըստ երկրորդի խառնուածոյն. դէմ ընդդէ՛մ միմեանց խառնիցն իւրաքանչի՛ւր ճարմանդքն[724]։ [724] Այլք. Իւրաքանչիւր խառնիցին ճարմանդքն։ կամ խառնիցին իւրա՛՛։
5 Յիսուն ճարմանդ կը դնես մի շերտի վրայ, յիսուն ճարմանդ էլ՝ կը դնես երկրորդ կցուածքի շերտի կողմից: Բոլոր ճարմանդները միմեանց դիմաց պէտք է լինեն:
5 Մէկ վարագոյրին վրայ յիսուն օղակ շինէ՛ եւ միւս կցուածքին վրայ եղած վարագոյրին վրայ ալ յիսուն օղակ շինէ՛։ Օղակները դէմ դիմաց պէտք է ըլլան։
Յիսուն ճարմանդ արասցես միում փեղկի, եւ յիսուն ճարմանդ արասցես ի կողմանէ փեղկին ըստ երկրորդի խառնուածոյն. դէմ ընդ դէմ միմեանց իւրաքանչիւր խառնիցին ճարմանդքն:

26:5: Յիսո՛ւն ճարմանդ արասցես միում փեղկի. եւ յիսուն ճարմանդ արասցես ՚ի կողմանէ փեղկին ըստ երկրորդի խառնուածոյն. դէմ ընդդէ՛մ միմեանց խառնիցն իւրաքանչի՛ւր ճարմանդքն[724]։
[724] Այլք. Իւրաքանչիւր խառնիցին ճարմանդքն։ կամ խառնիցին իւրա՛՛։
5 Յիսուն ճարմանդ կը դնես մի շերտի վրայ, յիսուն ճարմանդ էլ՝ կը դնես երկրորդ կցուածքի շերտի կողմից: Բոլոր ճարմանդները միմեանց դիմաց պէտք է լինեն:
5 Մէկ վարագոյրին վրայ յիսուն օղակ շինէ՛ եւ միւս կցուածքին վրայ եղած վարագոյրին վրայ ալ յիսուն օղակ շինէ՛։ Օղակները դէմ դիմաց պէտք է ըլլան։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
26:55: пятьдесят петлей сделай у одного покрывала и пятьдесят петлей сделай на краю покрывала, которое соединяется с другим; петли [должны] соответствовать одна другой;
26:5 πεντήκοντα πεντηκοντα fifty ἀγκύλας αγκυλη do; make τῇ ο the αὐλαίᾳ αυλαια the μιᾷ εις.1 one; unit καὶ και and; even πεντήκοντα πεντηκοντα fifty ἀγκύλας αγκυλη do; make ἐκ εκ from; out of τοῦ ο the μέρους μερος part; in particular τῆς ο the αὐλαίας αυλαια down; by τὴν ο the συμβολὴν συμβολη the δευτέρας δευτερος second ἀντιπρόσωποι αντιπροσωπος fall against; resist ἀλλήλαις αλληλων one another εἰς εις into; for ἑκάστην εκαστος each
26:5 חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים ḥᵃmiššˈîm חָמֵשׁ five לֻֽלָאֹ֗ת lˈulāʔˈōṯ לֻלָאֹת loops תַּעֲשֶׂה֮ taʕᵃśeh עשׂה make בַּ ba בְּ in † הַ the יְרִיעָ֣ה yᵊrîʕˈā יְרִיעָה curtain הָ hā הַ the אֶחָת֒ ʔeḥˌāṯ אֶחָד one וַ wa וְ and חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים ḥᵃmiššˈîm חָמֵשׁ five לֻֽלָאֹ֗ת lˈulāʔˈōṯ לֻלָאֹת loops תַּעֲשֶׂה֙ taʕᵃśˌeh עשׂה make בִּ bi בְּ in קְצֵ֣ה qᵊṣˈē קָצֶה end הַ ha הַ the יְרִיעָ֔ה yᵊrîʕˈā יְרִיעָה curtain אֲשֶׁ֖ר ʔᵃšˌer אֲשֶׁר [relative] בַּ ba בְּ in † הַ the מַּחְבֶּ֣רֶת mmaḥbˈereṯ מַחְבֶּרֶת junction הַ ha הַ the שֵּׁנִ֑ית ššēnˈîṯ שֵׁנִי second מַקְבִּילֹת֙ maqbîlˌōṯ קבל take הַ ha הַ the לֻּ֣לָאֹ֔ת llˈulāʔˈōṯ לֻלָאֹת loops אִשָּׁ֖ה ʔiššˌā אִשָּׁה woman אֶל־ ʔel- אֶל to אֲחֹתָֽהּ׃ ʔᵃḥōṯˈāh אָחֹות sister
26:5. quinquagenas ansulas cortina habebit in utraque parte ita insertas ut ansa contra ansam veniat et altera alteri possit aptariEvery curtain shall have fifty loops on both sides, so set on, that one loop may be against another loop, and one may be fitted to the other.
5. Fifty loops shalt thou make in the one curtain, and fifty loops shalt thou make in the edge of the curtain that is in the second coupling; the loops shall be opposite one to another.
Fifty loops shalt thou make in the one curtain, and fifty loops shalt thou make in the edge of the curtain that [is] in the coupling of the second; that the loops may take hold one of another:

5: пятьдесят петлей сделай у одного покрывала и пятьдесят петлей сделай на краю покрывала, которое соединяется с другим; петли [должны] соответствовать одна другой;
26:5
πεντήκοντα πεντηκοντα fifty
ἀγκύλας αγκυλη do; make
τῇ ο the
αὐλαίᾳ αυλαια the
μιᾷ εις.1 one; unit
καὶ και and; even
πεντήκοντα πεντηκοντα fifty
ἀγκύλας αγκυλη do; make
ἐκ εκ from; out of
τοῦ ο the
μέρους μερος part; in particular
τῆς ο the
αὐλαίας αυλαια down; by
τὴν ο the
συμβολὴν συμβολη the
δευτέρας δευτερος second
ἀντιπρόσωποι αντιπροσωπος fall against; resist
ἀλλήλαις αλληλων one another
εἰς εις into; for
ἑκάστην εκαστος each
26:5
חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים ḥᵃmiššˈîm חָמֵשׁ five
לֻֽלָאֹ֗ת lˈulāʔˈōṯ לֻלָאֹת loops
תַּעֲשֶׂה֮ taʕᵃśeh עשׂה make
בַּ ba בְּ in
הַ the
יְרִיעָ֣ה yᵊrîʕˈā יְרִיעָה curtain
הָ הַ the
אֶחָת֒ ʔeḥˌāṯ אֶחָד one
וַ wa וְ and
חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים ḥᵃmiššˈîm חָמֵשׁ five
לֻֽלָאֹ֗ת lˈulāʔˈōṯ לֻלָאֹת loops
תַּעֲשֶׂה֙ taʕᵃśˌeh עשׂה make
בִּ bi בְּ in
קְצֵ֣ה qᵊṣˈē קָצֶה end
הַ ha הַ the
יְרִיעָ֔ה yᵊrîʕˈā יְרִיעָה curtain
אֲשֶׁ֖ר ʔᵃšˌer אֲשֶׁר [relative]
בַּ ba בְּ in
הַ the
מַּחְבֶּ֣רֶת mmaḥbˈereṯ מַחְבֶּרֶת junction
הַ ha הַ the
שֵּׁנִ֑ית ššēnˈîṯ שֵׁנִי second
מַקְבִּילֹת֙ maqbîlˌōṯ קבל take
הַ ha הַ the
לֻּ֣לָאֹ֔ת llˈulāʔˈōṯ לֻלָאֹת loops
אִשָּׁ֖ה ʔiššˌā אִשָּׁה woman
אֶל־ ʔel- אֶל to
אֲחֹתָֽהּ׃ ʔᵃḥōṯˈāh אָחֹות sister
26:5. quinquagenas ansulas cortina habebit in utraque parte ita insertas ut ansa contra ansam veniat et altera alteri possit aptari
Every curtain shall have fifty loops on both sides, so set on, that one loop may be against another loop, and one may be fitted to the other.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jg▾ gnv▾ ab▾ all ▾
Albert Barnes: Notes on the Bible - 1834
26:5
The words "in the edge," etc. mean, "on the edge of the breadth that is at the coupling in the second (curtain)."
Geneva 1599
26:5 Fifty loops shalt thou make in the one curtain, and fifty loops shalt thou make in the edge of the curtain that [is] in the coupling of the (c) second; that the loops may take hold one of another.
(c) In tying together both the sides.
John Gill
26:5 Fifty loops shalt thou make in the one curtain,.... In the first great curtain, or in the outermost of the five that were sewed together:
and fifty loops shalt thou make in the edge of the curtain that is in the coupling of the second; as many also were to be made in the outermost of the second great curtain where it was to be coupled with the first:
that the loops may take hold one of another; or rather that they might answer to one another in both curtains; for the loops could not take hold of one another, only were made to meet together by the taches, hooks, or clasps put into them, next mentioned.
26:626:6: Եւ արասցես յիսուն օղս ոսկիս՝ եւ խառնեսցե՛ս զփեղկսն ընդ միմեանս աղխիւքն. եւ եղիցի խորա՛ն մի[725]։ [725] ՚Ի լուս՛՛. Յիսուն աղխս ոսկիս. համաձայն բազմաց ՚ի բնաբ՛՛։
6 Կը պատրաստես յիսուն ոսկէ օղակներ եւ շերտերը իրար կը միացնես կեռիկներով: Այսպիսով կը ստացուի մի խորան:
6 Յիսուն կարթաձեւ ոսկի ճարմանդներ շինէ՛։ Վարագոյրները ճարմանդներով կոճկէ՛ եւ խորան մը թող ըլլայ։
Եւ արասցես յիսուն օղս ոսկիս, եւ խառնեսցես զփեղկսն ընդ միմեանս աղխիւքն. եւ եղիցի խորան մի:

26:6: Եւ արասցես յիսուն օղս ոսկիս՝ եւ խառնեսցե՛ս զփեղկսն ընդ միմեանս աղխիւքն. եւ եղիցի խորա՛ն մի[725]։
[725] ՚Ի լուս՛՛. Յիսուն աղխս ոսկիս. համաձայն բազմաց ՚ի բնաբ՛՛։
6 Կը պատրաստես յիսուն ոսկէ օղակներ եւ շերտերը իրար կը միացնես կեռիկներով: Այսպիսով կը ստացուի մի խորան:
6 Յիսուն կարթաձեւ ոսկի ճարմանդներ շինէ՛։ Վարագոյրները ճարմանդներով կոճկէ՛ եւ խորան մը թող ըլլայ։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
26:66: и сделай пятьдесят крючков золотых и крючками соедини покрывала одно с другим, и будет скиния одно [целое].
26:6 καὶ και and; even ποιήσεις ποιεω do; make κρίκους κρικος fifty χρυσοῦς χρυσεος of gold; golden καὶ και and; even συνάψεις συναπτω the αὐλαίας αυλαια different; alternate τῇ ο the ἑτέρᾳ ετερος different; alternate τοῖς ο the κρίκοις κρικος and; even ἔσται ειμι be ἡ ο the σκηνὴ σκηνη tent μία εις.1 one; unit
26:6 וְ wᵊ וְ and עָשִׂ֕יתָ ʕāśˈîṯā עשׂה make חֲמִשִּׁ֖ים ḥᵃmiššˌîm חָמֵשׁ five קַרְסֵ֣י qarsˈê קֶרֶס hook זָהָ֑ב zāhˈāv זָהָב gold וְ wᵊ וְ and חִבַּרְתָּ֙ ḥibbartˌā חבר be united אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] הַ ha הַ the יְרִיעֹ֜ת yᵊrîʕˈōṯ יְרִיעָה curtain אִשָּׁ֤ה ʔiššˈā אִשָּׁה woman אֶל־ ʔel- אֶל to אֲחֹתָהּ֙ ʔᵃḥōṯˌāh אָחֹות sister בַּ ba בְּ in † הַ the קְּרָסִ֔ים qqᵊrāsˈîm קֶרֶס hook וְ wᵊ וְ and הָיָ֥ה hāyˌā היה be הַ ha הַ the מִּשְׁכָּ֖ן mmiškˌān מִשְׁכָּן dwelling-place אֶחָֽד׃ פ ʔeḥˈāḏ . f אֶחָד one
26:6. facies et quinquaginta circulos aureos quibus cortinarum vela iungenda sunt ut unum tabernaculum fiatThou shalt make also fifty rings of gold, wherewith the veils of the curtains are to be joined, that it may be made one tabernacle.
6. And thou shalt make fifty clasps of gold, and couple the curtains one to another with the clasps: and the tabernacle shall be one.
And thou shalt make fifty taches of gold, and couple the curtains together with the taches: and it shall be one tabernacle:

6: и сделай пятьдесят крючков золотых и крючками соедини покрывала одно с другим, и будет скиния одно [целое].
26:6
καὶ και and; even
ποιήσεις ποιεω do; make
κρίκους κρικος fifty
χρυσοῦς χρυσεος of gold; golden
καὶ και and; even
συνάψεις συναπτω the
αὐλαίας αυλαια different; alternate
τῇ ο the
ἑτέρᾳ ετερος different; alternate
τοῖς ο the
κρίκοις κρικος and; even
ἔσται ειμι be
ο the
σκηνὴ σκηνη tent
μία εις.1 one; unit
26:6
וְ wᵊ וְ and
עָשִׂ֕יתָ ʕāśˈîṯā עשׂה make
חֲמִשִּׁ֖ים ḥᵃmiššˌîm חָמֵשׁ five
קַרְסֵ֣י qarsˈê קֶרֶס hook
זָהָ֑ב zāhˈāv זָהָב gold
וְ wᵊ וְ and
חִבַּרְתָּ֙ ḥibbartˌā חבר be united
אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker]
הַ ha הַ the
יְרִיעֹ֜ת yᵊrîʕˈōṯ יְרִיעָה curtain
אִשָּׁ֤ה ʔiššˈā אִשָּׁה woman
אֶל־ ʔel- אֶל to
אֲחֹתָהּ֙ ʔᵃḥōṯˌāh אָחֹות sister
בַּ ba בְּ in
הַ the
קְּרָסִ֔ים qqᵊrāsˈîm קֶרֶס hook
וְ wᵊ וְ and
הָיָ֥ה hāyˌā היה be
הַ ha הַ the
מִּשְׁכָּ֖ן mmiškˌān מִשְׁכָּן dwelling-place
אֶחָֽד׃ פ ʔeḥˈāḏ . f אֶחָד one
26:6. facies et quinquaginta circulos aureos quibus cortinarum vela iungenda sunt ut unum tabernaculum fiat
Thou shalt make also fifty rings of gold, wherewith the veils of the curtains are to be joined, that it may be made one tabernacle.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jfb▾ jg▾ kad▾ tr▾ ab▾ all ▾
Albert Barnes: Notes on the Bible - 1834
26:6
Taches of gold - Each "tache," or clasp, was to unite two opposite loops.
Couple the curtains - i. e. couple the two outside breadths mentioned in Exo 26:4.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
26:6: taches of gold: Exo 26:11, Exo 26:33, Exo 35:11, Exo 36:13, Exo 36:18, Exo 39:33
one tabernacle: Eph 1:22, Eph 1:23, Eph 4:16; Pe1 2:4, Pe1 2:5
Carl Friedrich Keil and Franz Delitzsch
26:6
Fifty golden clasps were also to be made, to fasten the pieces of drapery (the two halves of the tent-cloth) together, "that it might be a dwelling-place." This necessarily leads to Bhr's conclusion, that the tent-cloth, which consisted of two halves fastened together with the loops and clasps, answering to the two compartments of the dwelling-place (Ex 26:33), enclosed the whole of the interior, not only covering the open framework above, but the side walls also, and therefore that it hung down inside the walls, and that it was not spread out upon the wooden framework so as to form the ceiling, but hung down on the walls on the outside of the wooden beams, so that the gilded beams were left uncovered in the inside. For if this splendid tent-cloth had been intended for the ceiling only, and therefore only 30 cubits had been visible out of the 40 cubits of its breadth, and only 10 out of the 28 of its length-that is to say, if not much more than a third of the whole had been seen and used for the inner lining of the dwelling, - that is to say, if not much more than a third of the whole had been seen and used for the inner lining of the dwelling, - it would not have been called "the dwelling" so constantly as it is (cf. Ex 36:8; Ex 40:18), nor would the goats'-hair covering which was placed above it have been just as constantly called the "tent above the dwelling" (Ex 26:7; Ex 36:14; Ex 40:19). This inner tent-cloth was so spread out, that whilst it was fastened to the upper ends of the beams in a way that is not explained in the text, it formed the ceiling of the whole, and the joining came just above the curtain which divided the dwelling into two compartments. One half therefore, viz., the front half, formed the ceiling of the holy place with its entire breadth of 20 cubits and 10 cubits of its length, and the remaining 18 cubits of its length hung down over the two side walls, 9 cubits down each wall, - the planks that formed the walls being left uncovered, therefore, to the height of 1 cubit from the ground. In a similar manner the other half covered the holy of holies, 10 cubits of both length and breadth forming the ceiling, and the 10 cubits that remained of the entire length covering the end wall; whilst the folds in the corners that arose from the 9 cubits that hung down on either side, were no doubt so adjusted that the walls appeared to be perfectly smooth. (For further remarks, see Ex 39:33.)
John Gill
26:6 And thou shalt make fifty taches of gold,.... Which some render "buttons" (i), others "hooks" (k) they seem to be "clasps"; the use of them follows:
and couple the curtains together with the taches; the two great curtains were made out of the ten, which had in them fifty(i) "fibulas", Tigurine version, Vatablus (k) "Uncinos", Pagninus, Montanus, Drusius; so the Targums of Onkelos and Jonathan.
Robert Jamieson, A. R. Fausset and David Brown
26:6 taches--clasps; supposed in shape, as well as in use, to be the same as hooks and eyes.
26:726:7: Եւ արասցես վերնափե՛ղկս մազեղէնս նուարտան խորանին, մետասան փեղկ գործեսցես զնոսա։
7 Խորանի համար այծի մազից հիւսուած ծածկոց կը պատրաստես: Տասնմէկ շերտերից թող բաղկացած լինի այն:
7 Խորանին վրայ ծածկոց ըլլալու համար այծի մազէ վարագոյրներ շինէ։ Տասնըմէկ վարագոյրներ շինէ՛։
Եւ արասցես վերնափեղկս մազեղէնս նուարտան խորանին, մետասան փեղկ գործեսցես զնոսա:

26:7: Եւ արասցես վերնափե՛ղկս մազեղէնս նուարտան խորանին, մետասան փեղկ գործեսցես զնոսա։
7 Խորանի համար այծի մազից հիւսուած ծածկոց կը պատրաստես: Տասնմէկ շերտերից թող բաղկացած լինի այն:
7 Խորանին վրայ ծածկոց ըլլալու համար այծի մազէ վարագոյրներ շինէ։ Տասնըմէկ վարագոյրներ շինէ՛։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
26:77: И сделай покрывала на козьей [шерсти], чтобы покрывать скинию; одиннадцать покрывал сделай таких;
26:7 καὶ και and; even ποιήσεις ποιεω do; make δέρρεις δερρις in; on τῆς ο the σκηνῆς σκηνη tent ἕνδεκα ενδεκα eleven δέρρεις δερρις do; make αὐτάς αυτος he; him
26:7 וְ wᵊ וְ and עָשִׂ֨יתָ֙ ʕāśˈîṯā עשׂה make יְרִיעֹ֣ת yᵊrîʕˈōṯ יְרִיעָה curtain עִזִּ֔ים ʕizzˈîm עֵז goat לְ lᵊ לְ to אֹ֖הֶל ʔˌōhel אֹהֶל tent עַל־ ʕal- עַל upon הַ ha הַ the מִּשְׁכָּ֑ן mmiškˈān מִשְׁכָּן dwelling-place עַשְׁתֵּי־ ʕaštê- עַשְׁתֵּי eleven עֶשְׂרֵ֥ה ʕeśrˌē עֶשְׂרֵה -teen יְרִיעֹ֖ת yᵊrîʕˌōṯ יְרִיעָה curtain תַּעֲשֶׂ֥ה taʕᵃśˌeh עשׂה make אֹתָֽם׃ ʔōṯˈām אֵת [object marker]
26:7. facies et saga cilicina undecim ad operiendum tectum tabernaculiThou shalt make also eleven curtains of goats' hair, to cover the top of the tabernacle.
7. And thou shalt make curtains of goats’ for a tent over the tabernacle: eleven curtains shalt thou make them.
And thou shalt make curtains [of] goats' [hair] to be a covering upon the tabernacle: eleven curtains shalt thou make:

7: И сделай покрывала на козьей [шерсти], чтобы покрывать скинию; одиннадцать покрывал сделай таких;
26:7
καὶ και and; even
ποιήσεις ποιεω do; make
δέρρεις δερρις in; on
τῆς ο the
σκηνῆς σκηνη tent
ἕνδεκα ενδεκα eleven
δέρρεις δερρις do; make
αὐτάς αυτος he; him
26:7
וְ wᵊ וְ and
עָשִׂ֨יתָ֙ ʕāśˈîṯā עשׂה make
יְרִיעֹ֣ת yᵊrîʕˈōṯ יְרִיעָה curtain
עִזִּ֔ים ʕizzˈîm עֵז goat
לְ lᵊ לְ to
אֹ֖הֶל ʔˌōhel אֹהֶל tent
עַל־ ʕal- עַל upon
הַ ha הַ the
מִּשְׁכָּ֑ן mmiškˈān מִשְׁכָּן dwelling-place
עַשְׁתֵּי־ ʕaštê- עַשְׁתֵּי eleven
עֶשְׂרֵ֥ה ʕeśrˌē עֶשְׂרֵה -teen
יְרִיעֹ֖ת yᵊrîʕˌōṯ יְרִיעָה curtain
תַּעֲשֶׂ֥ה taʕᵃśˌeh עשׂה make
אֹתָֽם׃ ʔōṯˈām אֵת [object marker]
26:7. facies et saga cilicina undecim ad operiendum tectum tabernaculi
Thou shalt make also eleven curtains of goats' hair, to cover the top of the tabernacle.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jfb▾ jg▾ gnv▾ kad▾ tr▾ ab▾ ac▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
7-8: Второй ряд покрывал, поверх нижнего покрова, состоял из отдельных одиннадцати полос, сделанных из козьей шерсти. По своей длине в 30: локтей он превосходил нижний покров на два локтя, а по ширине (44: л.) на четыре.
Adam Clarke: Commentary on the Bible - 1831
26:7: Curtains of goats' hair - Stuff made of goats' hair. See Clarke's note on Exo 25:4. This was the second covering.
Albert Barnes: Notes on the Bible - 1834
26:7
A covering upon the tabernacle - A tent over the tabernacle. The Hebrew word here used, is the regular one for a tent of skins or cloth of any sort.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
26:7: curtains: Exo 35:26, Exo 36:14-18; Num 4:25; Psa 45:13; Pe1 3:4, Pe1 5:5
goats' hair: Izzim, goats, but used here elliptically for goats' hair. In different parts of Asia Minor, Syria, Cilicia, and Phrygia, the goats have long, fine, and beautiful hair; in some cases, almost as fine as silk, which is shorn at proper times, and manufactured into garments. Exo 25:4, Exo 35:6, Exo 35:23; Num 31:20
a: Exo 26:14; Isa 4:5
eleven: Exo 26:1, Exo 26:9, Exo 26:12
Carl Friedrich Keil and Franz Delitzsch
26:7
The outer tent-cloth, "for the tent over the dwelling," was to consist of eleven lengths of goats' hair, i.e., of cloth made of goats' hair;
(Note: The coverings of the tents of the Bedouin Arabs are still made of cloth woven from black goats' hair, which the women spin and weave (see Lynch's Expedition of the United States to the Jordan and Dead Sea).)
each piece being thirty cubits long and four broad.
Geneva 1599
26:7 And thou shalt make curtains [of] goats' [hair] to be a (d) covering upon the tabernacle: eleven curtains shalt thou make.
(d) Lest rain and weather should mar it.
John Gill
26:7 And thou shalt make curtains of goats' hair,.... Jarchi calls it the flower or down of goats, the softer and finer part of their hair, which was spun by women, as appears from Ex 35:26, and was made up into a stuff somewhat like our camelot; these curtains were coarser than the former, and were made to be put over them, to preserve them from the weather, as it follows:
to be a covering upon the tabernacle: which, by the curtains of linen coupled together, became one tabernacle, as in the preceding verse: and these curtains were to be a tent or covering over them: they were somewhat like, being made of the same matter, with the coverings with which the ancient Arabs covered their tents, which were made of goats' hair, as were the tents of Kedar alluded to in Song 1:5, these curtains of goats' hair denote the outward appearance of Christ in human nature, who, attended with all human infirmities, excepting sin, was in the form of a servant, in great meanness and poverty, covered with reproach, and had in the greatest contempt, and especially at the time of his sufferings and death; though all rich and glorious within, full of grace, and of all the blessings of grace, of righteousness and life, of light, joy, peace, and comfort for his people; and may also denote the mean appearance of the church and people of God outwardly; being, generally speaking, a poor and an afflicted people, subject to the scorn, reproach, and persecutions of men, but all glorious within, enriched with the grace of God and righteousness of Christ; and so, in one respect, like these curtains of goats' hair, and, in another respect, like the curtains of fine linen:
eleven curtains shalt thou make; one more than the other; the reason of which was, that there might be one at the entrance of the tabernacle, there being no linen curtain there, see Ex 26:9.
Robert Jamieson, A. R. Fausset and David Brown
26:7 curtains of goats' hair--These coarse curtains were to be one more in number than the others, and to extend a yard lower on each side, the use of them being to protect and conceal the richer curtains.
26:826:8: Երկայնութիւն միոյ փեղկի՝ լինիցի յերեսուն կանգնոյ. եւ լայնութիւն միոյ փեղկի ՚ի չորից կանգնոց։ չափ՝ նո՛յն եղիցի մետասանեցունց փեղկիցն[726]։ [726] Ոմանք. Մետասանեցունց փեղկացն։
8 Ամէն մի շերտի երկարութիւնը պէտք է լինի երեսուն կանգուն, իսկ լայնութիւնը՝ չորս կանգուն: Տասնմէկ շերտերի չափսը նոյնը պէտք է լինի:
8 Մէկ վարագոյրին երկայնութիւնը երեսուն կանգուն եւ մէկ վարագոյրին լայնութիւնը չորս կանգուն ըլլայ. տասնըմէկ վարագոյրներուն չափը նոյնը ըլլայ։
Երկայնութիւն միոյ փեղկի` լինիցի յերեսուն կանգնոյ. եւ լայնութիւն միոյ փեղկի ի չորից կանգնոց. չափ նոյն եղիցի մետասանեցունց փեղկիցն:

26:8: Երկայնութիւն միոյ փեղկի՝ լինիցի յերեսուն կանգնոյ. եւ լայնութիւն միոյ փեղկի ՚ի չորից կանգնոց։ չափ՝ նո՛յն եղիցի մետասանեցունց փեղկիցն[726]։
[726] Ոմանք. Մետասանեցունց փեղկացն։
8 Ամէն մի շերտի երկարութիւնը պէտք է լինի երեսուն կանգուն, իսկ լայնութիւնը՝ չորս կանգուն: Տասնմէկ շերտերի չափսը նոյնը պէտք է լինի:
8 Մէկ վարագոյրին երկայնութիւնը երեսուն կանգուն եւ մէկ վարագոյրին լայնութիւնը չորս կանգուն ըլլայ. տասնըմէկ վարագոյրներուն չափը նոյնը ըլլայ։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
26:88: длина одного покрывала тридцать локтей, а ширина четыре локтя; [это] одно покрывало: одиннадцати покрывалам одна мера.
26:8 τὸ ο the μῆκος μηκος length τῆς ο the δέρρεως δερρις the μιᾶς εις.1 one; unit ἔσται ειμι be τριάκοντα τριακοντα thirty πήχεων πηχυς forearm; foot and a half καὶ και and; even τεσσάρων τεσσαρες four πήχεων πηχυς forearm; foot and a half τὸ ο the εὖρος ευρος the δέρρεως δερρις the μιᾶς εις.1 one; unit μέτρον μετρον measure τὸ ο the αὐτὸ αυτος he; him ἔσται ειμι be ταῖς ο the ἕνδεκα ενδεκα eleven δέρρεσι δερρις hide
26:8 אֹ֣רֶךְ׀ ʔˈōreḵ אֹרֶךְ length הַ ha הַ the יְרִיעָ֣ה yᵊrîʕˈā יְרִיעָה curtain הָֽ hˈā הַ the אַחַ֗ת ʔaḥˈaṯ אֶחָד one שְׁלֹשִׁים֙ šᵊlōšîm שָׁלֹשׁ three בָּֽ bˈā בְּ in † הַ the אַמָּ֔ה ʔammˈā אַמָּה cubit וְ wᵊ וְ and רֹ֨חַב֙ rˈōḥav רֹחַב breadth אַרְבַּ֣ע ʔarbˈaʕ אַרְבַּע four בָּ bā בְּ in † הַ the אַמָּ֔ה ʔammˈā אַמָּה cubit הַ ha הַ the יְרִיעָ֖ה yᵊrîʕˌā יְרִיעָה curtain הָ hā הַ the אֶחָ֑ת ʔeḥˈāṯ אֶחָד one מִדָּ֣ה middˈā מִדָּה measured stretch אַחַ֔ת ʔaḥˈaṯ אֶחָד one לְ lᵊ לְ to עַשְׁתֵּ֥י ʕaštˌê עַשְׁתֵּי eleven עֶשְׂרֵ֖ה ʕeśrˌē עֶשְׂרֵה -teen יְרִיעֹֽת׃ yᵊrîʕˈōṯ יְרִיעָה curtain
26:8. longitudo sagi unius habebit triginta cubitos et latitudo quattuor aequa erit mensura sagorum omniumThe length of one hair-curtain shall be thirty cubits; and the breadth, four: the measure of all the curtains shall be equal.
8. The length of each curtain shall be thirty cubits, and the breadth of each curtain four cubits: the eleven curtains shall have one measure.
The length of one curtain [shall be] thirty cubits, and the breadth of one curtain four cubits: and the eleven curtains [shall be all] of one measure:

8: длина одного покрывала тридцать локтей, а ширина четыре локтя; [это] одно покрывало: одиннадцати покрывалам одна мера.
26:8
τὸ ο the
μῆκος μηκος length
τῆς ο the
δέρρεως δερρις the
μιᾶς εις.1 one; unit
ἔσται ειμι be
τριάκοντα τριακοντα thirty
πήχεων πηχυς forearm; foot and a half
καὶ και and; even
τεσσάρων τεσσαρες four
πήχεων πηχυς forearm; foot and a half
τὸ ο the
εὖρος ευρος the
δέρρεως δερρις the
μιᾶς εις.1 one; unit
μέτρον μετρον measure
τὸ ο the
αὐτὸ αυτος he; him
ἔσται ειμι be
ταῖς ο the
ἕνδεκα ενδεκα eleven
δέρρεσι δερρις hide
26:8
אֹ֣רֶךְ׀ ʔˈōreḵ אֹרֶךְ length
הַ ha הַ the
יְרִיעָ֣ה yᵊrîʕˈā יְרִיעָה curtain
הָֽ hˈā הַ the
אַחַ֗ת ʔaḥˈaṯ אֶחָד one
שְׁלֹשִׁים֙ šᵊlōšîm שָׁלֹשׁ three
בָּֽ bˈā בְּ in
הַ the
אַמָּ֔ה ʔammˈā אַמָּה cubit
וְ wᵊ וְ and
רֹ֨חַב֙ rˈōḥav רֹחַב breadth
אַרְבַּ֣ע ʔarbˈaʕ אַרְבַּע four
בָּ בְּ in
הַ the
אַמָּ֔ה ʔammˈā אַמָּה cubit
הַ ha הַ the
יְרִיעָ֖ה yᵊrîʕˌā יְרִיעָה curtain
הָ הַ the
אֶחָ֑ת ʔeḥˈāṯ אֶחָד one
מִדָּ֣ה middˈā מִדָּה measured stretch
אַחַ֔ת ʔaḥˈaṯ אֶחָד one
לְ lᵊ לְ to
עַשְׁתֵּ֥י ʕaštˌê עַשְׁתֵּי eleven
עֶשְׂרֵ֖ה ʕeśrˌē עֶשְׂרֵה -teen
יְרִיעֹֽת׃ yᵊrîʕˈōṯ יְרִיעָה curtain
26:8. longitudo sagi unius habebit triginta cubitos et latitudo quattuor aequa erit mensura sagorum omnium
The length of one hair-curtain shall be thirty cubits; and the breadth, four: the measure of all the curtains shall be equal.
8. The length of each curtain shall be thirty cubits, and the breadth of each curtain four cubits: the eleven curtains shall have one measure.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jg▾ tr▾ all ▾
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
26:8: length of one curtain: Exo 26:2, Exo 26:13
John Gill
26:8 The length of one curtain shall be thirty cubits, and the breadth of one curtain four cubits,.... The breadth of them is the same with the linen curtains, but the length of them two cubits more; the reason of which was, that they might hang down lower on either side, and the better preserve them from any injury:
and the eleven curtains shall be all of one measure; as to length and breadth.
26:926:9: Եւ խառնեսցե՛ս ընդ միմեանս զհինգ փեղկն ՚ի միասին, եւ զվեց փեղկն ՚ի միասին։ եւ կրկնեսցես զվե՛ցերորդ փեղկն առաջոյ կողմանէ խորանին։
9 Հինգ շերտերը իրար կը միացնես առանձին եւ վեց շերտերը՝ առանձին: Վեցերորդ շերտը իբրեւ կրկնակի ծածկոց թող կախուի խորանի ճակատի կողմից:
9 Հինգ վարագոյրները զատ ու վեց վարագոյրները զատ կցէ՛ եւ վեցերորդ վարագոյրը խորանին առջեւի կողմէն երկպատիկ ըրէ՛։
Եւ խառնեսցես ընդ միմեանս զհինգ փեղկսն ի միասին, եւ զվեց փեղկսն ի միասին. եւ կրկնեսցես զվեցերորդ փեղկն առաջոյ կողմանէ խորանին:

26:9: Եւ խառնեսցե՛ս ընդ միմեանս զհինգ փեղկն ՚ի միասին, եւ զվեց փեղկն ՚ի միասին։ եւ կրկնեսցես զվե՛ցերորդ փեղկն առաջոյ կողմանէ խորանին։
9 Հինգ շերտերը իրար կը միացնես առանձին եւ վեց շերտերը՝ առանձին: Վեցերորդ շերտը իբրեւ կրկնակի ծածկոց թող կախուի խորանի ճակատի կողմից:
9 Հինգ վարագոյրները զատ ու վեց վարագոյրները զատ կցէ՛ եւ վեցերորդ վարագոյրը խորանին առջեւի կողմէն երկպատիկ ըրէ՛։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
26:99: И соедини пять покрывал особо и шесть покрывал особо; шестое покрывало сделай двойное с передней стороны скинии.
26:9 καὶ και and; even συνάψεις συναπτω the πέντε πεντε five δέρρεις δερρις in; on τὸ ο the αὐτὸ αυτος he; him καὶ και and; even τὰς ο the ἓξ εξ six δέρρεις δερρις in; on τὸ ο the αὐτό αυτος he; him καὶ και and; even ἐπιδιπλώσεις επιδιπλοω the δέρριν δερρις the ἕκτην εκτος.1 sixth κατὰ κατα down; by πρόσωπον προσωπον face; ahead of τῆς ο the σκηνῆς σκηνη tent
26:9 וְ wᵊ וְ and חִבַּרְתָּ֞ ḥibbartˈā חבר be united אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] חֲמֵ֤שׁ ḥᵃmˈēš חָמֵשׁ five הַ ha הַ the יְרִיעֹת֙ yᵊrîʕˌōṯ יְרִיעָה curtain לְ lᵊ לְ to בָ֔ד vˈāḏ בַּד linen, part, stave וְ wᵊ וְ and אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] שֵׁ֥שׁ šˌēš שֵׁשׁ six הַ ha הַ the יְרִיעֹ֖ת yᵊrîʕˌōṯ יְרִיעָה curtain לְ lᵊ לְ to בָ֑ד vˈāḏ בַּד linen, part, stave וְ wᵊ וְ and כָפַלְתָּ֙ ḵāfaltˌā כפל fold double אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] הַ ha הַ the יְרִיעָ֣ה yᵊrîʕˈā יְרִיעָה curtain הַ ha הַ the שִּׁשִּׁ֔ית ššiššˈîṯ שִׁשִּׁי sixth אֶל־ ʔel- אֶל to מ֖וּל mˌûl מוּל front פְּנֵ֥י pᵊnˌê פָּנֶה face הָ hā הַ the אֹֽהֶל׃ ʔˈōhel אֹהֶל tent
26:9. e quibus quinque iunges seorsum et sex sibi mutuo copulabis ita ut sextum sagum in fronte tecti duplicesFive of which thou shalt couple by themselves, and the six others thou shalt couple one to another, so as to double the sixth curtain in the front of the roof.
9. And thou shalt couple five curtains by themselves, and six curtains by themselves, and shalt double over the sixth curtain in the forefront of the tent.
And thou shalt couple five curtains by themselves, and six curtains by themselves, and shalt double the sixth curtain in the forefront of the tabernacle:

9: И соедини пять покрывал особо и шесть покрывал особо; шестое покрывало сделай двойное с передней стороны скинии.
26:9
καὶ και and; even
συνάψεις συναπτω the
πέντε πεντε five
δέρρεις δερρις in; on
τὸ ο the
αὐτὸ αυτος he; him
καὶ και and; even
τὰς ο the
ἓξ εξ six
δέρρεις δερρις in; on
τὸ ο the
αὐτό αυτος he; him
καὶ και and; even
ἐπιδιπλώσεις επιδιπλοω the
δέρριν δερρις the
ἕκτην εκτος.1 sixth
κατὰ κατα down; by
πρόσωπον προσωπον face; ahead of
τῆς ο the
σκηνῆς σκηνη tent
26:9
וְ wᵊ וְ and
חִבַּרְתָּ֞ ḥibbartˈā חבר be united
אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker]
חֲמֵ֤שׁ ḥᵃmˈēš חָמֵשׁ five
הַ ha הַ the
יְרִיעֹת֙ yᵊrîʕˌōṯ יְרִיעָה curtain
לְ lᵊ לְ to
בָ֔ד vˈāḏ בַּד linen, part, stave
וְ wᵊ וְ and
אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker]
שֵׁ֥שׁ šˌēš שֵׁשׁ six
הַ ha הַ the
יְרִיעֹ֖ת yᵊrîʕˌōṯ יְרִיעָה curtain
לְ lᵊ לְ to
בָ֑ד vˈāḏ בַּד linen, part, stave
וְ wᵊ וְ and
כָפַלְתָּ֙ ḵāfaltˌā כפל fold double
אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker]
הַ ha הַ the
יְרִיעָ֣ה yᵊrîʕˈā יְרִיעָה curtain
הַ ha הַ the
שִּׁשִּׁ֔ית ššiššˈîṯ שִׁשִּׁי sixth
אֶל־ ʔel- אֶל to
מ֖וּל mˌûl מוּל front
פְּנֵ֥י pᵊnˌê פָּנֶה face
הָ הַ the
אֹֽהֶל׃ ʔˈōhel אֹהֶל tent
26:9. e quibus quinque iunges seorsum et sex sibi mutuo copulabis ita ut sextum sagum in fronte tecti duplices
Five of which thou shalt couple by themselves, and the six others thou shalt couple one to another, so as to double the sixth curtain in the front of the roof.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jg▾ gnv▾ kad▾ tr▾ ab▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
9: Пять полостей были сшиты в одно покрывало, а остальные шесть — в другое. Шестая полость в этом покрывале имела такое назначение. Одна половина ее, т. е. два локтя, назначалась, по указанию 12: ст., для задней — западной стороны скинии. Благодаря этому, 10: 1/2: покрывал, имевших в ширину 42: локтя, покрывали сорок локтей длины скинии: двадцать локтей шло на покрытие святилища, десять — святого святых и двенадцать на покрытие десяти локтей западной стороны. Лишние два локтя требовались для того, чтобы закрыть ее до самой земли, прикрыть ту часть столбов, для покрытия которой нижние покрывала оказались короткими. Собственно, эти два локтя шли на толщину брусьев, и так как, по всей вероятности, их было много, то остаток был загнут. Другая половина излишней шестой полости была спущена на переднюю, восточную сторону скинии. Здесь она, как думают, образовала то, что в греческих постройках называлось «aetwma» т. е. выступ, образуемый нижним краем крыши на фасадных сторонах, в виде треугольного карниза.
Albert Barnes: Notes on the Bible - 1834
26:9
tabernacle - tent, not tabernacle. The passage might be rendered, "thou shalt equally divide the sixth breadth at the front of the tent." In this way, half a breadth would overhang at the front and half at the back.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
26:9: five curtains by themselves: Exo 26:3
Carl Friedrich Keil and Franz Delitzsch
26:9
Five of these were to be connected (sewed together) by themselves (לבד), and the other six in the same manner; and the sixth piece was to be made double, i.e., folded together, towards the front of the tent, so as to form a kind of gable, as Josephus has also explained the passage (Ant. iii. 6, 4).
Geneva 1599
26:9 And thou shalt couple five curtains by themselves, and six curtains by themselves, and shalt double the (e) sixth curtain in the forefront of the tabernacle.
(e) That is, five on the one side, and five on the other, and the sixth should hang over the door of the tabernacle.
John Gill
26:9 And thou shall couple five curtains by themselves,.... And make one large curtain of them, as was ordered with respect to the linen curtains:
and six curtains by themselves; as there were eleven of them, such a division was made of five into one large curtain, and six into another; and as that which had six in it would reach further than the other, provision is made for the disposal and use of that as follows:
and shall double the sixth curtain in the forefront of the tabernacle; at the entrance of it, in the east end of it; the sixth curtain reaching to that, and hanging down, was turned up, and so doubled, opposite the door or entrance; and was, as Jarchi says, like a modest bride that covers her face with a vail, which before this had no covering; for thus it was, as Dr. Lightfoot (m) describes it, the holy place was ten yards long, and the five curtains sewed together were just so broad, and so they covered only the top and the sides, but hung not down at the end, which was eastward--but the six (goat hair curtains) that lay east reached to the end, covered the pillars whereon that vail hung, and they hung half a curtain's breadth or a yard over the entrance.
(m) Works, vol. 1. p. 718.
26:1026:10: Եւ արասցես ճարմանդս յիսուն առ եզերբ միոյ փեղկին ՚ի մէ՛ջ խառնուածոյն։ եւ յիսուն ճարմա՛նդ արասցես առ եզերբ փեղկին երկրորդի՛ խառնուածոյն[727]։ [727] Յօրինակին մերում միայն՝ աստի սկսեալ՝ ճարմանդն գրի եւս ճարամանդ, ըստ որում եւ մեք եդաք։
10 Յիսուն ճարմանդ կը պատրաստես կցուածքի ամէն շերտի եզերքին, յիսուն ճարմանդ էլ՝ երկրորդ կցուածքի շերտի եզերքին:
10 Կցուածքին ծայրը եղած մէկ վարագոյրին եզերքին վրայ յիսուն օղակ ու միւս կցուածքին ծայրը եղած վարագոյրին եզերքին վրայ յիսուն օղակ շինէ՛։
Եւ արասցես ճարմանդս յիսուն առ եզերբ միոյ փեղկին ի մէջ խառնուածոյն. եւ յիսուն ճարմանդ արասցես առ եզերբ փեղկին երկրորդի խառնուածոյն:

26:10: Եւ արասցես ճարմանդս յիսուն առ եզերբ միոյ փեղկին ՚ի մէ՛ջ խառնուածոյն։ եւ յիսուն ճարմա՛նդ արասցես առ եզերբ փեղկին երկրորդի՛ խառնուածոյն[727]։
[727] Յօրինակին մերում միայն՝ աստի սկսեալ՝ ճարմանդն գրի եւս ճարամանդ, ըստ որում եւ մեք եդաք։
10 Յիսուն ճարմանդ կը պատրաստես կցուածքի ամէն շերտի եզերքին, յիսուն ճարմանդ էլ՝ երկրորդ կցուածքի շերտի եզերքին:
10 Կցուածքին ծայրը եղած մէկ վարագոյրին եզերքին վրայ յիսուն օղակ ու միւս կցուածքին ծայրը եղած վարագոյրին եզերքին վրայ յիսուն օղակ շինէ՛։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
26:1010: Сделай пятьдесят петлей на краю крайнего покрывала, для соединения его [с другим], и пятьдесят петлей на краю другого покрывала, для соединения с ним;
26:10 καὶ και and; even ποιήσεις ποιεω do; make ἀγκύλας αγκυλη fifty ἐπὶ επι in; on τοῦ ο the χείλους χειλος lip; shore τῆς ο the δέρρεως δερρις the μιᾶς εις.1 one; unit τῆς ο the ἀνὰ ανα.1 up; each μέσον μεσος in the midst; in the middle κατὰ κατα down; by συμβολὴν συμβολη and; even πεντήκοντα πεντηκοντα fifty ἀγκύλας αγκυλη do; make ἐπὶ επι in; on τοῦ ο the χείλους χειλος lip; shore τῆς ο the δέρρεως δερρις the συναπτούσης συναπτω the δευτέρας δευτερος second
26:10 וְ wᵊ וְ and עָשִׂ֜יתָ ʕāśˈîṯā עשׂה make חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים ḥᵃmiššˈîm חָמֵשׁ five לֻֽלָאֹ֗ת lˈulāʔˈōṯ לֻלָאֹת loops עַ֣ל ʕˈal עַל upon שְׂפַ֤ת śᵊfˈaṯ שָׂפָה lip הַ ha הַ the יְרִיעָה֙ yᵊrîʕˌā יְרִיעָה curtain הָֽ hˈā הַ the אֶחָ֔ת ʔeḥˈāṯ אֶחָד one הַ ha הַ the קִּיצֹנָ֖ה qqîṣōnˌā קִיצֹון outermost בַּ ba בְּ in † הַ the חֹבָ֑רֶת ḥōvˈāreṯ חֹבֶרֶת drapery וַ wa וְ and חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים ḥᵃmiššˈîm חָמֵשׁ five לֻֽלָאֹ֗ת lˈulāʔˈōṯ לֻלָאֹת loops עַ֚ל ˈʕal עַל upon שְׂפַ֣ת śᵊfˈaṯ שָׂפָה lip הַ ha הַ the יְרִיעָ֔ה yᵊrîʕˈā יְרִיעָה curtain הַ ha הַ the חֹבֶ֖רֶת ḥōvˌereṯ חֹבֶרֶת drapery הַ ha הַ the שֵּׁנִֽית׃ ššēnˈîṯ שֵׁנִי second
26:10. facies et quinquaginta ansas in ora sagi unius ut coniungi cum altero queat et quinquaginta ansas in ora sagi alterius ut cum altero copuleturThou shalt make also fifty loops in the edge of one curtain, that it may be joined with the other: and fifty loops in the edge of the other curtain, that it may be coupled with its fellow.
10. And thou shalt make fifty loops on the edge of the one curtain that is outmost in the coupling, and fifty loops upon the edge of the curtain which is the second coupling.
And thou shalt make fifty loops on the edge of the one curtain [that is] outmost in the coupling, and fifty loops in the edge of the curtain which coupleth the second:

10: Сделай пятьдесят петлей на краю крайнего покрывала, для соединения его [с другим], и пятьдесят петлей на краю другого покрывала, для соединения с ним;
26:10
καὶ και and; even
ποιήσεις ποιεω do; make
ἀγκύλας αγκυλη fifty
ἐπὶ επι in; on
τοῦ ο the
χείλους χειλος lip; shore
τῆς ο the
δέρρεως δερρις the
μιᾶς εις.1 one; unit
τῆς ο the
ἀνὰ ανα.1 up; each
μέσον μεσος in the midst; in the middle
κατὰ κατα down; by
συμβολὴν συμβολη and; even
πεντήκοντα πεντηκοντα fifty
ἀγκύλας αγκυλη do; make
ἐπὶ επι in; on
τοῦ ο the
χείλους χειλος lip; shore
τῆς ο the
δέρρεως δερρις the
συναπτούσης συναπτω the
δευτέρας δευτερος second
26:10
וְ wᵊ וְ and
עָשִׂ֜יתָ ʕāśˈîṯā עשׂה make
חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים ḥᵃmiššˈîm חָמֵשׁ five
לֻֽלָאֹ֗ת lˈulāʔˈōṯ לֻלָאֹת loops
עַ֣ל ʕˈal עַל upon
שְׂפַ֤ת śᵊfˈaṯ שָׂפָה lip
הַ ha הַ the
יְרִיעָה֙ yᵊrîʕˌā יְרִיעָה curtain
הָֽ hˈā הַ the
אֶחָ֔ת ʔeḥˈāṯ אֶחָד one
הַ ha הַ the
קִּיצֹנָ֖ה qqîṣōnˌā קִיצֹון outermost
בַּ ba בְּ in
הַ the
חֹבָ֑רֶת ḥōvˈāreṯ חֹבֶרֶת drapery
וַ wa וְ and
חֲמִשִּׁ֣ים ḥᵃmiššˈîm חָמֵשׁ five
לֻֽלָאֹ֗ת lˈulāʔˈōṯ לֻלָאֹת loops
עַ֚ל ˈʕal עַל upon
שְׂפַ֣ת śᵊfˈaṯ שָׂפָה lip
הַ ha הַ the
יְרִיעָ֔ה yᵊrîʕˈā יְרִיעָה curtain
הַ ha הַ the
חֹבֶ֖רֶת ḥōvˌereṯ חֹבֶרֶת drapery
הַ ha הַ the
שֵּׁנִֽית׃ ššēnˈîṯ שֵׁנִי second
26:10. facies et quinquaginta ansas in ora sagi unius ut coniungi cum altero queat et quinquaginta ansas in ora sagi alterius ut cum altero copuletur
Thou shalt make also fifty loops in the edge of one curtain, that it may be joined with the other: and fifty loops in the edge of the other curtain, that it may be coupled with its fellow.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jg▾ kad▾ tr▾ ab▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
10-11: На кромке последнего из сшитых вместе пяти покрывал и на кромке из сшитых вместе шести покрывал сделано по пятидесяти петлей, которые должны были, как и в кожаных покрывалах, приходиться одна против другой. Вставленные в эти петли медные крючки соединяли покров.
Albert Barnes: Notes on the Bible - 1834
26:10
Or: "And thou shalt make fifty loops on the edge of the outside breadth of the one (curtain) at the coupling, and fifty loops on the edge of the outside breadth of the other (curtain) at the coupling."
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
26:10: fifty loops: Exo 26:4-6
Carl Friedrich Keil and Franz Delitzsch
26:10
Fifty loops and clasps were to be made to join the two halves together, as in the case of the inner tapestry, only the clasps were to be of brass or copper.
John Gill
26:10 And thou shalt make fifty loops on the edge of the one curtain, that is outmost in the coupling,.... Just in like manner, and in the same place where they were ordered to be put on the linen curtains, only these are not said to be of blue, but perhaps were wrought with goats hair: and fifty loops in the edge of the curtain which coupleth the second; these loops were set on each of the curtains where the two large pieces were to be coupled together.
26:1126:11: Եւ արասցես օ՛ղս պղնձիս յիսուն, եւ խառնեսցե՛ս զօղսն ընդ ճարմանդսն. եւ կցեսցե՛ս զփեղկսն՝ եւ եղիցին մի։
11 Կը պատրաստես յիսուն պղնձէ օղակներ եւ ճարմանդները օղակների մէջ անցկացնելով՝ իրար կը միացնես շերտերը: Կը ստացուի մի ամբողջութիւն:
11 Պղնձէ յիսուն կարթաձեւ ճարմանդներ շինէ՛ ու ճարմանդները օղակներուն անցո՛ւր եւ վրանը կոճկէ, որպէս զի մէկ կտոր ըլլայ։
Եւ արասցես օղս պղնձիս յիսուն, եւ խառնեսցես զօղսն ընդ ճարմանդսն, եւ կցեսցես զփեղկսն, եւ եղիցին մի:

26:11: Եւ արասցես օ՛ղս պղնձիս յիսուն, եւ խառնեսցե՛ս զօղսն ընդ ճարմանդսն. եւ կցեսցե՛ս զփեղկսն՝ եւ եղիցին մի։
11 Կը պատրաստես յիսուն պղնձէ օղակներ եւ ճարմանդները օղակների մէջ անցկացնելով՝ իրար կը միացնես շերտերը: Կը ստացուի մի ամբողջութիւն:
11 Պղնձէ յիսուն կարթաձեւ ճարմանդներ շինէ՛ ու ճարմանդները օղակներուն անցո՛ւր եւ վրանը կոճկէ, որպէս զի մէկ կտոր ըլլայ։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
26:1111: сделай пятьдесят крючков медных, и вложи крючки в петли, и соедини покров, чтобы он составлял одно.
26:11 καὶ και and; even ποιήσεις ποιεω do; make κρίκους κρικος of brass πεντήκοντα πεντηκοντα fifty καὶ και and; even συνάψεις συναπτω the κρίκους κρικος from; out of τῶν ο the ἀγκυλῶν αγκυλη and; even συνάψεις συναπτω the δέρρεις δερρις and; even ἔσται ειμι be ἕν εις.1 one; unit
26:11 וְ wᵊ וְ and עָשִׂ֛יתָ ʕāśˈîṯā עשׂה make קַרְסֵ֥י qarsˌê קֶרֶס hook נְחֹ֖שֶׁת nᵊḥˌōšeṯ נְחֹשֶׁת bronze חֲמִשִּׁ֑ים ḥᵃmiššˈîm חָמֵשׁ five וְ wᵊ וְ and הֵבֵאתָ֤ hēvēṯˈā בוא come אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] הַ ha הַ the קְּרָסִים֙ qqᵊrāsîm קֶרֶס hook בַּ ba בְּ in † הַ the לֻּ֣לָאֹ֔ת llˈulāʔˈōṯ לֻלָאֹת loops וְ wᵊ וְ and חִבַּרְתָּ֥ ḥibbartˌā חבר be united אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] הָ hā הַ the אֹ֖הֶל ʔˌōhel אֹהֶל tent וְ wᵊ וְ and הָיָ֥ה hāyˌā היה be אֶחָֽד׃ ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one
26:11. quinquaginta fibulas aeneas quibus iungantur ansae et unum ex omnibus operimentum fiatThou shalt make also fifty buckles of brass, wherewith the loops may be joined, that of all there may be made one covering.
11. And thou shalt make fifty clasps of brass, and put the clasps into the loops, and couple the tent together, that it may be one.
And thou shalt make fifty taches of brass, and put the taches into the loops, and couple the tent together, that it may be one:

11: сделай пятьдесят крючков медных, и вложи крючки в петли, и соедини покров, чтобы он составлял одно.
26:11
καὶ και and; even
ποιήσεις ποιεω do; make
κρίκους κρικος of brass
πεντήκοντα πεντηκοντα fifty
καὶ και and; even
συνάψεις συναπτω the
κρίκους κρικος from; out of
τῶν ο the
ἀγκυλῶν αγκυλη and; even
συνάψεις συναπτω the
δέρρεις δερρις and; even
ἔσται ειμι be
ἕν εις.1 one; unit
26:11
וְ wᵊ וְ and
עָשִׂ֛יתָ ʕāśˈîṯā עשׂה make
קַרְסֵ֥י qarsˌê קֶרֶס hook
נְחֹ֖שֶׁת nᵊḥˌōšeṯ נְחֹשֶׁת bronze
חֲמִשִּׁ֑ים ḥᵃmiššˈîm חָמֵשׁ five
וְ wᵊ וְ and
הֵבֵאתָ֤ hēvēṯˈā בוא come
אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker]
הַ ha הַ the
קְּרָסִים֙ qqᵊrāsîm קֶרֶס hook
בַּ ba בְּ in
הַ the
לֻּ֣לָאֹ֔ת llˈulāʔˈōṯ לֻלָאֹת loops
וְ wᵊ וְ and
חִבַּרְתָּ֥ ḥibbartˌā חבר be united
אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker]
הָ הַ the
אֹ֖הֶל ʔˌōhel אֹהֶל tent
וְ wᵊ וְ and
הָיָ֥ה hāyˌā היה be
אֶחָֽד׃ ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one
26:11. quinquaginta fibulas aeneas quibus iungantur ansae et unum ex omnibus operimentum fiat
Thou shalt make also fifty buckles of brass, wherewith the loops may be joined, that of all there may be made one covering.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jg▾ tr▾ ab▾ all ▾
Albert Barnes: Notes on the Bible - 1834
26:11
In the tent, clasps of bronze were used to unite the loops of the two curtains; in the tabernacle, clasps of gold, compare Exo 26:6, Exo 26:37.
Couple the tent together - Not "covering," as in the margin. By "the tent" is here meant the tent-cloth alone.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
26:11: tent: or, covering, Exo 26:3, Exo 26:6
John Gill
26:11 And thou shalt make fifty taches of brass,.... As these curtains were coarser, and also the loops, so the taches, hooks, or clasps, were made of meaner metal, but answered the purpose of joining and coupling together full as well: and put the taches into the loops; one end of the hook or clasp into the loop on one of the curtains, and the other end of the hook or clasp into the loop on the other curtain answering to it: and couple the tent together, that it may be one; that the tent or covering over the tabernacle might be one, as the tabernacle by the like means was, Ex 26:6.
26:1226:12: Եւ դիցես զաւելորդ փեղկին ՚ի ներքո՛յ խորանին. կիսով փեղկիւն աւելորդաւ մնացելով ծածկեսցե՛ս զապարումս փեղկից խորանին յետոյ կողմանէ[728], [728] Ոմանք. Զաւելորդ փեղկիցն... կիսով փեղկին։
12 Շերտերի աւելացած մասերը կը տեղաւորես վրանի տակ. շերտի այդ աւելացած մասի կէսով կը ծածկես վրանի ծայրամասերը՝ յետեւի կողմից:
12 Վրանին վարագոյրներէն աւելորդ մնացածը, այսինքն վարագոյրին աւելցած կէսը, խորանին ետեւէն թող կախուած մնայ։
Եւ [357]դիցես զաւելորդ փեղկիցն ի ներքոյ խորանին. կիսով փեղկիւն աւելորդաւ մնացելով ծածկեսցես զապարումս փեղկից խորանին յետոյ կողմանէ:

26:12: Եւ դիցես զաւելորդ փեղկին ՚ի ներքո՛յ խորանին. կիսով փեղկիւն աւելորդաւ մնացելով ծածկեսցե՛ս զապարումս փեղկից խորանին յետոյ կողմանէ[728],
[728] Ոմանք. Զաւելորդ փեղկիցն... կիսով փեղկին։
12 Շերտերի աւելացած մասերը կը տեղաւորես վրանի տակ. շերտի այդ աւելացած մասի կէսով կը ծածկես վրանի ծայրամասերը՝ յետեւի կողմից:
12 Վրանին վարագոյրներէն աւելորդ մնացածը, այսինքն վարագոյրին աւելցած կէսը, խորանին ետեւէն թող կախուած մնայ։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
26:1212: А излишек, остающийся от покрывал скиний, --половина излишнего покрывала пусть будет свешена на задней стороне скинии;
26:12 καὶ και and; even ὑποθήσεις υποτιθημι submit; risk τὸ ο the πλεονάζον πλεοναζω increase ἐν εν in ταῖς ο the δέρρεσιν δερρις the σκηνῆς σκηνη tent τὸ ο the ἥμισυ ημισυς half τῆς ο the δέρρεως δερρις the ὑπολελειμμένον υπολειπω leave below / behind ὑποκαλύψεις υποκαλυπτω the πλεονάζον πλεοναζω increase τῶν ο the δέρρεων δερρις the σκηνῆς σκηνη tent ὑποκαλύψεις υποκαλυπτω in back; after τῆς ο the σκηνῆς σκηνη tent
26:12 וְ wᵊ וְ and סֶ֨רַח֙ sˈeraḥ סֶרַח overhanging הָ hā הַ the עֹדֵ֔ף ʕōḏˈēf עדף remain בִּ bi בְּ in ירִיעֹ֖ת yrîʕˌōṯ יְרִיעָה curtain הָ hā הַ the אֹ֑הֶל ʔˈōhel אֹהֶל tent חֲצִ֤י ḥᵃṣˈî חֲצִי half הַ ha הַ the יְרִיעָה֙ yᵊrîʕˌā יְרִיעָה curtain הָ hā הַ the עֹדֶ֔פֶת ʕōḏˈefeṯ עדף remain תִּסְרַ֕ח tisrˈaḥ סרח overhang עַ֖ל ʕˌal עַל upon אֲחֹרֵ֥י ʔᵃḥōrˌê אָחֹור back(wards) הַ ha הַ the מִּשְׁכָּֽן׃ mmiškˈān מִשְׁכָּן dwelling-place
26:12. quod autem superfuerit in sagis quae parantur tecto id est unum sagum quod amplius est ex medietate eius operies posteriora tabernaculiAnd that which shall remain of the curtains, that are prepared for the roof, to wit, one curtain that is over and above, with the half thereof thou shalt cover the back parts of the tabernacle.
12. And the overhanging part that remaineth of the curtains of the tent, the half curtain that remaineth, shall hang over the back of the tabernacle.
And the remnant that remaineth of the curtains of the tent, the half curtain that remaineth, shall hang over the backside of the tabernacle:

12: А излишек, остающийся от покрывал скиний, --половина излишнего покрывала пусть будет свешена на задней стороне скинии;
26:12
καὶ και and; even
ὑποθήσεις υποτιθημι submit; risk
τὸ ο the
πλεονάζον πλεοναζω increase
ἐν εν in
ταῖς ο the
δέρρεσιν δερρις the
σκηνῆς σκηνη tent
τὸ ο the
ἥμισυ ημισυς half
τῆς ο the
δέρρεως δερρις the
ὑπολελειμμένον υπολειπω leave below / behind
ὑποκαλύψεις υποκαλυπτω the
πλεονάζον πλεοναζω increase
τῶν ο the
δέρρεων δερρις the
σκηνῆς σκηνη tent
ὑποκαλύψεις υποκαλυπτω in back; after
τῆς ο the
σκηνῆς σκηνη tent
26:12
וְ wᵊ וְ and
סֶ֨רַח֙ sˈeraḥ סֶרַח overhanging
הָ הַ the
עֹדֵ֔ף ʕōḏˈēf עדף remain
בִּ bi בְּ in
ירִיעֹ֖ת yrîʕˌōṯ יְרִיעָה curtain
הָ הַ the
אֹ֑הֶל ʔˈōhel אֹהֶל tent
חֲצִ֤י ḥᵃṣˈî חֲצִי half
הַ ha הַ the
יְרִיעָה֙ yᵊrîʕˌā יְרִיעָה curtain
הָ הַ the
עֹדֶ֔פֶת ʕōḏˈefeṯ עדף remain
תִּסְרַ֕ח tisrˈaḥ סרח overhang
עַ֖ל ʕˌal עַל upon
אֲחֹרֵ֥י ʔᵃḥōrˌê אָחֹור back(wards)
הַ ha הַ the
מִּשְׁכָּֽן׃ mmiškˈān מִשְׁכָּן dwelling-place
26:12. quod autem superfuerit in sagis quae parantur tecto id est unum sagum quod amplius est ex medietate eius operies posteriora tabernaculi
And that which shall remain of the curtains, that are prepared for the roof, to wit, one curtain that is over and above, with the half thereof thou shalt cover the back parts of the tabernacle.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jg▾ gnv▾ kad▾ tr▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
12: См. в объяснении ст. 9.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
26:12: shall hang over: Exo 26:9
Carl Friedrich Keil and Franz Delitzsch
26:12
This tent-cloth was two cubits longer than the inner one, as each piece was 30 cubits long instead of 28; it was also two cubits broader, as it was composed of 11 pieces, the eleventh only reckoning as two cubits, as it was to be laid double. Consequently there was an excess (העדף that which is over) of two cubits each way; and according to Ex 26:12 and Ex 26:13 this was to be disposed of in the following manner: "As for the spreading out of the excess in the tent-cloths, the half of the cloth in excess shall spread out over the back of the dwelling; and the cubit from here and from there in the excess in the length of the tent-cloths (i.e., the cubit over in the length in each of the cloths) shall be spread out on the sides of the dwelling from here and from there to cover it." Now since, according to this, one half of the two cubits of the sixth piece which was laid double was to hang down the back of the tabernacle, there only remained one cubit for the gable of the front. It follows, therefore, that the joining of the two halves with loops and clasps would come a cubit farther back, than the place where the curtain of the holy of holies divided the dwelling. But in consequence of the cloth being a cubit longer in every direction, it nearly reached the ground on all three sides, the thickness of the wooden framework alone preventing it from reaching it altogether.
Geneva 1599
26:12 And the (f) remnant that remaineth of the curtains of the tent, the half curtain that remaineth, shall hang over the backside of the tabernacle.
(f) For these curtains were two cubits longer than the curtain of the tabernacle so that they were wider by a cubit of both sides.
John Gill
26:12 And the remnant that remaineth of the curtains of the tent,.... Of the goat hair curtains, which were one more than the linen curtains:
the half curtain that remaineth; for the other half extended to the east end of it, at the entrance of the tabernacle, and hung down and was doubled there, and the other that remained is here disposed of:
shall hang over the backside of the tabernacle; the west end of it, where was the holy of holies; or rather, as Dr. Lightfoot (n) describes it, thus, it was when those curtains (of goats' hair) were laid upon the other over the tabernacle; they were not laid as these brazen loops (clasps it should be) did light just upon the golden ones over the vail, but three quarters of a yard more westward, so that the five curtains that went west did reach to the ground and half a curtain to spare, Ex 26:12 the other six that lay east reached to the end, covered the pillars whereon that vail hung, and they hung half a curtain's breadth or a yard over the entrance.
(n) Works, vol. 1. p. 719.
26:1326:13: կանգնաւ՝ յա՛յսմ կողմանէ, եւ կանգնաւ՝ յա՛յնմ կողմանէ. յաւելորդէ երկայնութեան փեղկից խորանին. եւ եղիցի ծածկե՛լ զապարումս խորանին աստի անտի։
13 Վրանի վարագոյրների երկարութեան աւելացած մասից մի կանգուն թող կախուի այս կողմից եւ մի կանգուն՝ այն կողմից: Վրանի ծայրերը թող ծածկուեն այս ու այն կողմից:
13 Վրանին վարագոյրներուն երկայնութենէն մէկ կանգուն մէկ կողմէն ու մէկ կանգուն միւս կողմէն աւելցածը խորանին քովերը թող կախուած մնան՝ զանիկա մէկ կողմէն ու միւս կողմէն ծածկելու համար։
կանգնաւ` յայսմ կողմանէ, եւ կանգնաւ` յայնմ կողմանէ, յաւելորդէ երկայնութեան փեղկից խորանին եղիցի ծածկել զապարումս խորանին աստի անտի:

26:13: կանգնաւ՝ յա՛յսմ կողմանէ, եւ կանգնաւ՝ յա՛յնմ կողմանէ. յաւելորդէ երկայնութեան փեղկից խորանին. եւ եղիցի ծածկե՛լ զապարումս խորանին աստի անտի։
13 Վրանի վարագոյրների երկարութեան աւելացած մասից մի կանգուն թող կախուի այս կողմից եւ մի կանգուն՝ այն կողմից: Վրանի ծայրերը թող ծածկուեն այս ու այն կողմից:
13 Վրանին վարագոյրներուն երկայնութենէն մէկ կանգուն մէկ կողմէն ու մէկ կանգուն միւս կողմէն աւելցածը խորանին քովերը թող կախուած մնան՝ զանիկա մէկ կողմէն ու միւս կողմէն ծածկելու համար։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
26:1313: а излишек от длины покрывал скинии, на локоть с одной и на локоть с другой стороны, пусть будет свешен по бокам скинии с той и с другой стороны, для покрытия ее.
26:13 πῆχυν πηχυς forearm; foot and a half ἐκ εκ from; out of τούτου ουτος this; he καὶ και and; even πῆχυν πηχυς forearm; foot and a half ἐκ εκ from; out of τούτου ουτος this; he ἐκ εκ from; out of τοῦ ο the ὑπερέχοντος υπερεχω excel; prevail τῶν ο the δέρρεων δερρις from; out of τοῦ ο the μήκους μηκος length τῶν ο the δέρρεων δερρις the σκηνῆς σκηνη tent ἔσται ειμι be συγκαλύπτον συγκαλυπτω conceal ἐπὶ επι in; on τὰ ο the πλάγια πλαγιος the σκηνῆς σκηνη tent ἔνθεν ενθαδε this place; back here καὶ και and; even ἔνθεν ενθαδε this place; back here ἵνα ινα so; that καλύπτῃ καλυπτω cover
26:13 וְ wᵊ וְ and הָ hā הַ the אַמָּ֨ה ʔammˌā אַמָּה cubit מִ mi מִן from זֶּ֜ה zzˈeh זֶה this וְ wᵊ וְ and הָ hā הַ the אַמָּ֤ה ʔammˈā אַמָּה cubit מִ mi מִן from זֶּה֙ zzˌeh זֶה this בָּ bā בְּ in † הַ the עֹדֵ֔ף ʕōḏˈēf עדף remain בְּ bᵊ בְּ in אֹ֖רֶךְ ʔˌōreḵ אֹרֶךְ length יְרִיעֹ֣ת yᵊrîʕˈōṯ יְרִיעָה curtain הָ hā הַ the אֹ֑הֶל ʔˈōhel אֹהֶל tent יִהְיֶ֨ה yihyˌeh היה be סָר֜וּחַ sārˈûₐḥ סָרוּחַ overhanging עַל־ ʕal- עַל upon צִדֵּ֧י ṣiddˈê צַד side הַ ha הַ the מִּשְׁכָּ֛ן mmiškˈān מִשְׁכָּן dwelling-place מִ mi מִן from זֶּ֥ה zzˌeh זֶה this וּ û וְ and מִ mi מִן from זֶּ֖ה zzˌeh זֶה this לְ lᵊ לְ to כַסֹּתֹֽו׃ ḵassōṯˈô כסה cover
26:13. et cubitus ex una parte pendebit et alter ex altera qui plus est in sagorum longitudine utrumque latus tabernaculi protegensAnd there shall hang down a cubit on the one side, and another on the other side, which is over and above in the length of the curtains, fencing both sides of the tabernacle.
13. And the cubit on the one side, and the cubit on the other side, of that which remaineth in the length of the curtains of the tent, shall hang over the sides of the tabernacle on this side and on that side, to cover it.
And a cubit on the one side, and a cubit on the other side of that which remaineth in the length of the curtains of the tent, it shall hang over the sides of the tabernacle on this side and on that side, to cover it:

13: а излишек от длины покрывал скинии, на локоть с одной и на локоть с другой стороны, пусть будет свешен по бокам скинии с той и с другой стороны, для покрытия ее.
26:13
πῆχυν πηχυς forearm; foot and a half
ἐκ εκ from; out of
τούτου ουτος this; he
καὶ και and; even
πῆχυν πηχυς forearm; foot and a half
ἐκ εκ from; out of
τούτου ουτος this; he
ἐκ εκ from; out of
τοῦ ο the
ὑπερέχοντος υπερεχω excel; prevail
τῶν ο the
δέρρεων δερρις from; out of
τοῦ ο the
μήκους μηκος length
τῶν ο the
δέρρεων δερρις the
σκηνῆς σκηνη tent
ἔσται ειμι be
συγκαλύπτον συγκαλυπτω conceal
ἐπὶ επι in; on
τὰ ο the
πλάγια πλαγιος the
σκηνῆς σκηνη tent
ἔνθεν ενθαδε this place; back here
καὶ και and; even
ἔνθεν ενθαδε this place; back here
ἵνα ινα so; that
καλύπτῃ καλυπτω cover
26:13
וְ wᵊ וְ and
הָ הַ the
אַמָּ֨ה ʔammˌā אַמָּה cubit
מִ mi מִן from
זֶּ֜ה zzˈeh זֶה this
וְ wᵊ וְ and
הָ הַ the
אַמָּ֤ה ʔammˈā אַמָּה cubit
מִ mi מִן from
זֶּה֙ zzˌeh זֶה this
בָּ בְּ in
הַ the
עֹדֵ֔ף ʕōḏˈēf עדף remain
בְּ bᵊ בְּ in
אֹ֖רֶךְ ʔˌōreḵ אֹרֶךְ length
יְרִיעֹ֣ת yᵊrîʕˈōṯ יְרִיעָה curtain
הָ הַ the
אֹ֑הֶל ʔˈōhel אֹהֶל tent
יִהְיֶ֨ה yihyˌeh היה be
סָר֜וּחַ sārˈûₐḥ סָרוּחַ overhanging
עַל־ ʕal- עַל upon
צִדֵּ֧י ṣiddˈê צַד side
הַ ha הַ the
מִּשְׁכָּ֛ן mmiškˈān מִשְׁכָּן dwelling-place
מִ mi מִן from
זֶּ֥ה zzˌeh זֶה this
וּ û וְ and
מִ mi מִן from
זֶּ֖ה zzˌeh זֶה this
לְ lᵊ לְ to
כַסֹּתֹֽו׃ ḵassōṯˈô כסה cover
26:13. et cubitus ex una parte pendebit et alter ex altera qui plus est in sagorum longitudine utrumque latus tabernaculi protegens
And there shall hang down a cubit on the one side, and another on the other side, which is over and above in the length of the curtains, fencing both sides of the tabernacle.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jg▾ tr▾ ab▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
13: Полости второго покрова имели в длину 30: локтей (ст. 8) и потому могли закрыть ширину скинии. По сравнению с длиной полостей нижнего покрова они имели «излишек» в два локтя, — спускались на один локоть ниже цветных покрывал и по северной, и по южной стороне скинии, и таким образом прикрывали ту часть продольных столбов, для покрывания которой первые оказались короткими.
Albert Barnes: Notes on the Bible - 1834
26:13
The measure of the entire tabernacle-cloth was about 60 ft. by 42; that of the tent-cloth was about 67 ft. by 45. When the latter was placed over the former, it spread beyond it at the back and front about 3 ft. (the "half-curtain," Exo 26:9, Exo 26:12) and at the sides 18 inches.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
26:13: a cubit: Exo 26:2, Exo 26:8
of that which remaineth: Heb. in the remainder or surplusage
John Gill
26:13 And a cubit on the one side, and a cubit on the other side o that which remaineth in the length of the curtains of the tent,.... The curtains of the tent, or the goat hair curtains, were two cubits longer than the other, and these are the two cubits, one on one side and the other on the other, which remained, and by which they were longer than the linen curtains:
Tit shall hang over the sides of the tabernacle; the north and south sides: on this side:
and on that side, to cover it; and as the above learned doctor observes (o), their length of fifteen yards reached half a yard lower on either side than the other curtains did, and yet they came not to the ground by a quarter of a yard; so that the silver foundations (of which afterwards) were always plain to be seen everywhere but at the west end.
(o) Works, vol. 1. p. 719.
26:1426:14: Եւ արասցես զվիժակս խորանին ՚ի շիկակարմի՛ր մորթոց խոյոց։ եւ ծածկելիս ՚ի կապուտա՛կ մորթոյ ՚ի վերուստ[729]։ [729] ՚Ի լուս՛՛. Մորթոյ խոյոց. համաձայն այլոց ՚ի բնաբ՛՛։
14 Վրանի ծածկը կը պատրաստես խոյերի շիկակարմիր մորթուց, իսկ դրա վրայ էլ մի ծածկ կը դնես կապոյտ մորթուց:
14 Վրանին համար կարմիր ներկուած խոյի մորթերէն ծածկոց մը ու անոր վրայէն թէհաշի մորթերէն ծածկոց մը շինէ՛։
Եւ արասցես [358]զվիժակս խորանին ի շիկակարմիր մորթոյ խոյոց, եւ [359]ծածկելիս` ի կապուտակ`` մորթոյ ի վերուստ:

26:14: Եւ արասցես զվիժակս խորանին ՚ի շիկակարմի՛ր մորթոց խոյոց։ եւ ծածկելիս ՚ի կապուտա՛կ մորթոյ ՚ի վերուստ[729]։
[729] ՚Ի լուս՛՛. Մորթոյ խոյոց. համաձայն այլոց ՚ի բնաբ՛՛։
14 Վրանի ծածկը կը պատրաստես խոյերի շիկակարմիր մորթուց, իսկ դրա վրայ էլ մի ծածկ կը դնես կապոյտ մորթուց:
14 Վրանին համար կարմիր ներկուած խոյի մորթերէն ծածկոց մը ու անոր վրայէն թէհաշի մորթերէն ծածկոց մը շինէ՛։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
26:1414: И сделай покрышку для покрова из кож бараньих красных и еще покров верхний из кож синих.
26:14 καὶ και and; even ποιήσεις ποιεω do; make κατακάλυμμα κατακαλυμμα the σκηνῇ σκηνη tent δέρματα δερμα skin κριῶν κριος and; even ἐπικαλύμματα επικαλυμμα concealment δέρματα δερμα skin ὑακίνθινα υακινθινος hyacinth blue ἐπάνωθεν επανωθεν from above; above
26:14 וְ wᵊ וְ and עָשִׂ֤יתָ ʕāśˈîṯā עשׂה make מִכְסֶה֙ miḵsˌeh מִכְסֶה covering לָ lā לְ to † הַ the אֹ֔הֶל ʔˈōhel אֹהֶל tent עֹרֹ֥ת ʕōrˌōṯ עֹור skin אֵילִ֖ם ʔêlˌim אַיִל ram, despot מְאָדָּמִ֑ים mᵊʔoddāmˈîm אדם be ruddy וּ û וְ and מִכְסֵ֛ה miḵsˈē מִכְסֶה covering עֹרֹ֥ת ʕōrˌōṯ עֹור skin תְּחָשִׁ֖ים tᵊḥāšˌîm תַּחַשׁ tachash-skin מִ mi מִן from לְ lᵊ לְ to מָֽעְלָה׃ פ mˈāʕᵊlā . f מַעַל top
26:14. facies et operimentum aliud tecto de pellibus arietum rubricatis et super hoc rursum aliud operimentum de ianthinis pellibusThou shalt make also another cover to the roof of rams' skins dyed red: and over that again another cover of violet coloured skins.
14. And thou shalt make a covering for the tent of rams’ skins dyed red, and a covering of sealskins above.
And thou shalt make a covering for the tent [of] rams' skins dyed red, and a covering above [of] badgers' skins:

14: И сделай покрышку для покрова из кож бараньих красных и еще покров верхний из кож синих.
26:14
καὶ και and; even
ποιήσεις ποιεω do; make
κατακάλυμμα κατακαλυμμα the
σκηνῇ σκηνη tent
δέρματα δερμα skin
κριῶν κριος and; even
ἐπικαλύμματα επικαλυμμα concealment
δέρματα δερμα skin
ὑακίνθινα υακινθινος hyacinth blue
ἐπάνωθεν επανωθεν from above; above
26:14
וְ wᵊ וְ and
עָשִׂ֤יתָ ʕāśˈîṯā עשׂה make
מִכְסֶה֙ miḵsˌeh מִכְסֶה covering
לָ לְ to
הַ the
אֹ֔הֶל ʔˈōhel אֹהֶל tent
עֹרֹ֥ת ʕōrˌōṯ עֹור skin
אֵילִ֖ם ʔêlˌim אַיִל ram, despot
מְאָדָּמִ֑ים mᵊʔoddāmˈîm אדם be ruddy
וּ û וְ and
מִכְסֵ֛ה miḵsˈē מִכְסֶה covering
עֹרֹ֥ת ʕōrˌōṯ עֹור skin
תְּחָשִׁ֖ים tᵊḥāšˌîm תַּחַשׁ tachash-skin
מִ mi מִן from
לְ lᵊ לְ to
מָֽעְלָה׃ פ mˈāʕᵊlā . f מַעַל top
26:14. facies et operimentum aliud tecto de pellibus arietum rubricatis et super hoc rursum aliud operimentum de ianthinis pellibus
Thou shalt make also another cover to the roof of rams' skins dyed red: and over that again another cover of violet coloured skins.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jfb▾ jw▾ jg▾ gnv▾ kad▾ tr▾ ac▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
14: После распространения второго покрова скиния с наружной стороны была уже вполне готова. Но в таком виде она могла бы страдать от зимних дождей и частых в Аравийской пустыне ураганов. В виду этого для нее назначаются два других, более прочных, покрова. Как совершенно безыскусственные, они и не описываются подробно; текст указывает только их материал. Один был сафьянный, «из красных бараньих кож», другой, самый верхний, из материала «тахаш».
Adam Clarke: Commentary on the Bible - 1831
26:14: Rams' skins dyed red - See Clarke's note on Exo 25:5. This was the third covering; and what is called the badgers' skins was the fourth. See Clarke's note on Exo 25:5. Why there should have been four coverings does not appear. They might have been designed partly for respect; and partly to keep off dust and dirt, and the extremely fine sand which in that desert rises as it were on every breeze; and partly to keep off the intense heat of the sun, which would otherwise have destroyed the poles, bars, boards, and the whole of the wood work. As to the conjecture of some that "the four coverings were intended the better to keep off the rain," it must appear unfounded to those who know that in that desert rain was rarely ever seen.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
26:14: a covering: Exo 36:19; Num 4:5; Psa 27:5, Psa 121:4, Psa 121:5; Isa 4:6, Isa 25:4
rams' skins dyed red: Oroth ailim meoddamim, literally, the skins of red rams. It is a fact, attested by many respectable travellers, that in the Levant, sheep are often met with having red or violet coloured fleeces. Almost all ancient writers speak of the same thing. Exo 25:5, Exo 35:7, Exo 35:23, Exo 39:34; Num 4:10; Eze 16:10
badgers' skins: Oroth techashim, which nearly all the ancient versions have taken to be the name of a colour, though they differ very much with regard to the particular colour intended: the LXX, Vulgate, and Coptic, have skins dyed of a violet colour; the Syriac, azure; and the Arabic, black; and Bochart contends for the hysginus, a very deep blue. It may, however, denote an animal; for Dr. Geddes remarks, had the sacred writer meant to express only a variety of colour, he would hardly have repeated oroth, skins, after meoddamim, red, in Exo 25:5.
Carl Friedrich Keil and Franz Delitzsch
26:14
"The other coverings were placed on the top of this tent: one made of rams' skins dyed red, "as a covering for the tent," and another upon the top of this, made of the skins of the sea-cow (תּחשׁים, see at Ex 25:5).
Geneva 1599
26:14 And thou shalt make a (g) covering for the tent [of] rams' skins dyed red, and a covering above [of] (h) badgers' skins.
(g) To be put on the covering that was made of goats hair.
(h) This was the third covering of the tabernacle.
John Gill
26:14 And thou shalt make a covering for the tent of rams' skins dyed red,.... This was a covering that was put over the curtains of goats' skin; but whether it went all over them, or only upon the roof of the tabernacle they covered, to keep out the rains from soaking through, is not certain, nor very evident; Jarchi thinks the roof was only covered with this covering of rams' skins; but others think it more reasonable that the whole was covered with them to preserve from dust and rain:
and a covering above of badgers' skins; of these skins See Gill on Ex 25:5, this was a fourth covering of the tabernacle; the first was of linen curtains, the second of goats' hair, the third of rams' skins, and the fourth of badgers' skins, which seems to have been thicker and courser, since shoes were made of them, Ezek 16:10, R. Judah, as quoted by Jarchi, thinks the two last were but one covering, half of it consisting of rams' skins and half of it of badgers' skins; but the text is express that the latter was a covering above and over the former: these several coverings of the tabernacle show the care that God takes of his church and people, and how sufficiently they are provided for, that they may be in safety from all their enemies, being clothed with Christ's righteousness, and under the purple covering of his blood, and surrounded by his almighty power, see Is 4:5.
John Wesley
26:14 Badger skins - So we translate it, but it should rather seem to have been some strong sort of leather, (but very fine) for we read of the best sort of shoes made of it. Ezek 16:10.
Robert Jamieson, A. R. Fausset and David Brown
26:14 a covering . . . of rams' skins dyed red--that is, of Turkey red leather. [See on Ex 39:34.]
26:1526:15: Եւ արասցես զսիւնակս խորանին յանփո՛ւտ փայտից
15 Վրանի ուղղահայեաց մոյթերը կը պատրաստես կարծր փայտից:
15 Խորանին տախտակները Սատիմի փայտէ շինէ՛, որպէս զի կանգնած մնան։
Եւ արասցես [360]զսիւնակս խորանին յանփուտ փայտից կանգնաւորս:

26:15: Եւ արասցես զսիւնակս խորանին յանփո՛ւտ փայտից
15 Վրանի ուղղահայեաց մոյթերը կը պատրաստես կարծր փայտից:
15 Խորանին տախտակները Սատիմի փայտէ շինէ՛, որպէս զի կանգնած մնան։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
26:1515: И сделай брусья для скинии из дерева ситтим, чтобы они стояли:
26:15 καὶ και and; even ποιήσεις ποιεω do; make στύλους στυλος pillar τῇ ο the σκηνῇ σκηνη tent ἐκ εκ from; out of ξύλων ξυλον wood; timber ἀσήπτων ασηπτος not liable to decay
26:15 וְ wᵊ וְ and עָשִׂ֥יתָ ʕāśˌîṯā עשׂה make אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] הַ ha הַ the קְּרָשִׁ֖ים qqᵊrāšˌîm קֶרֶשׁ board לַ la לְ to † הַ the מִּשְׁכָּ֑ן mmiškˈān מִשְׁכָּן dwelling-place עֲצֵ֥י ʕᵃṣˌê עֵץ tree שִׁטִּ֖ים šiṭṭˌîm שִׁטָּה acacia עֹמְדִֽים׃ ʕōmᵊḏˈîm עמד stand
26:15. facies et tabulas stantes tabernaculi de lignis setthimThou shalt make also the boards of the tabernacle standing upright of setim wood.
15. And thou shalt make the boards for the tabernacle of acacia wood, standing up.
And thou shalt make boards for the tabernacle [of] shittim wood standing up:

15: И сделай брусья для скинии из дерева ситтим, чтобы они стояли:
26:15
καὶ και and; even
ποιήσεις ποιεω do; make
στύλους στυλος pillar
τῇ ο the
σκηνῇ σκηνη tent
ἐκ εκ from; out of
ξύλων ξυλον wood; timber
ἀσήπτων ασηπτος not liable to decay
26:15
וְ wᵊ וְ and
עָשִׂ֥יתָ ʕāśˌîṯā עשׂה make
אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker]
הַ ha הַ the
קְּרָשִׁ֖ים qqᵊrāšˌîm קֶרֶשׁ board
לַ la לְ to
הַ the
מִּשְׁכָּ֑ן mmiškˈān מִשְׁכָּן dwelling-place
עֲצֵ֥י ʕᵃṣˌê עֵץ tree
שִׁטִּ֖ים šiṭṭˌîm שִׁטָּה acacia
עֹמְדִֽים׃ ʕōmᵊḏˈîm עמד stand
26:15. facies et tabulas stantes tabernaculi de lignis setthim
Thou shalt make also the boards of the tabernacle standing upright of setim wood.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jfb▾ jw▾ jg▾ kad▾ tr▾ ac▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
15-16: Деревянный остов скинии состоял из брусьев, сделанных из аравийской акации. Говоря о длине (10: локтей) и ширине (1: 1/2: л.) брусьев, текст не упоминает об их толщине. Она может быть выведена из других определенно известных величин. Как видно из 22–23: ст., на западной стороне скинии стояло восемь брусьев, которые при ширине каждого в 1: 1/2: локтя давали 12: локтей. Но эта 12-локтевая ширина скинии не была ее внутренней шириной. По единогласному свидетельству Филона, Иосифа Флавия и всего иудейского предания, скиния имела внутреннюю ширину в десять локтей. Двенадцать локтей были, следовательно, наружной шириной скинии. 10-локтевая внутренняя могла получиться только в том случае, если продольные стены, упираясь в края задней или поперечной стороны, отнимали от ее 12-локтевой меры по одному локтю с одной и другой стороны. Это же последнее было возможно только в том случае, когда составляющие их брусья имели толщину одного локтя.
Adam Clarke: Commentary on the Bible - 1831
26:15: Thou shalt make boards - These formed what might be called the walls of the tabernacle, and were made of shittim wood, the acacia Nilotica, which Dr. Shaw says grows here in abundance. To have worked the acacia into these boards or planks, the Israelites must have had sawyers, joiners, etc., among them; but how they got the tools is a question. But as the Israelites were the general workmen of Egypt, and were brought up to every kind of trade for the service of their oppressors, we may naturally suppose that every artificer brought off some of his tools with him. For though it is not at all likely that they had any armor or defensive weapons in their power, yet for the reason above assigned they must have had the implements which were requisite for their respective trades.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
26:15: boards: Exo 26:18, Exo 26:22-29, Exo 36:20-33, Exo 40:17, Exo 40:18; Num 4:31, Num 4:32; Eph 2:20, Eph 2:21
of shittim: Exo 25:5
Carl Friedrich Keil and Franz Delitzsch
26:15
The wooden framework. - Ex 26:15, Ex 26:16. The boards for the dwelling were to be made "of acacia-wood standing," i.e., so that they could stand upright; each ten cubits long and one and a half broad. The thickness is not given; and if, on the one hand, we are not to imagine them too thin, as Josephus does, for example, who says they were only four fingers thick (Ant. iii. 6, 3), we have still less reason for following Rashi, Lund, Bhr and others, who suppose them to have been a cubit in thickness, thus making simple boards into colossal blocks, such as could neither have been cut from acacia-trees, nor carried upon desert roads.
(Note: Kamphausen (Stud. und Krit. 1859, p. 117) appeals to Bhr's Symbolik 1, p. 261-2, and Knobel, Exod. p. 261, in support of the opinion, that at any rate formerly there were genuine acacias of such size and strength, that beams could have been cut from them a cubit and a half broad and a cubit thick; but we look in vain to either of these writings for such authority as will establish this fact. Expressions like those of Jerome and Hasselquist, viz., grandes arbores and arbos ingens ramosissima, are far too indefinite. It is true that, according to Abdullatif, the Sont is "a very large tree," but he gives a quotation from Dinuri, in which it is merely spoken of as "a tree of the size of a nut-tree." See the passages cited in Rosenmller's bibl. Althk. iv. 1, p. 278, Not. 7, where we find the following remark of Wesling on Prosper. Alpin. de plantis Aeg.: Caudicem non raro ampliorem deprehendi, quam ut brachio meo circumdari possit. Even the statement of Theophrast (hist. plant. 4, 3), to the effect that rafters are cut from these trees 12 cubits long (δωδεκάπηχυς ἐρέψιμος ὕλη), is no proof that they were beams a cubit and a half broad and a cubit thick. And even if there had been trees of this size in the peninsula of Sinai in Moses' time, a beam of such dimensions, according to Kamphausen's calculation, which is by no means too high, would have weighed more than twelve cwt. And certainly the Israelites could never have carried beams of this weight with them through the desert; for the waggons needed would have been such as could never be used where there are no beaten roads.)
To obtain boards of the required breadth, to or three planks were no doubt joined together according to the size of the trees.
John Gill
26:15 And thou shalt make the boards for the tabernacle,.... Which were the pillars and supports, and properly the walls of it, which gave it its firmness and security, or otherwise the curtains would have been blown about by every wind: they were to be made
of shittim wood standing up; just as they grew, as a Jewish writer observes (p); these planks or boards were not to be laid along the lengthways of them, but to be set upright; and may denote such who are pillars in the house of God, and are to be upright both in heart and conversation, both ministers and private members; and indeed the church itself is the pillar and ground of truth, Gal 2:9.
(p) Bartenora in Misn. Succa, c. 3. sect. 14.
John Wesley
26:15 Very particular directions are here given about the boards of the tabernacle, which were to bear up the curtains. These had tenons which fell into the mortaises that were made for them in silver bases. The boards were coupled together with gold rings at top and bottom, and kept firm with bars that run through golden staples in every board. Thus every thing in the tabernacle was very splendid, agreeable to that infant state of the church, when such things were proper to possess the minds of the worshippers with a reverence of the divine glory. In allusion to this, the new Jerusalem is said to be of pure gold, Rev_ 21:18. But the builders of the gospel church said, Silver and gold have we none; and yet the glory of their building far exceeded that of the tabernacle.
Robert Jamieson, A. R. Fausset and David Brown
26:15 thou shalt make boards . . . rear up the tabernacle according to the fashion . . . which was showed thee--The tabernacle, from its name as well as from its general appearance and arrangements, was a tent; but from the description given in these verses, the boards that formed its walls, the five (cross) bars that strengthened them, and the middle bar that "reached from end to end," and gave it solidity and compactness, it was evidently a more substantial fabric than a light and fragile tent, probably on account of the weight of its various coverings as well as for the protection of its precious furniture.
26:1626:16: կանգնաւորս. ՚ի տա՛սն կանգնոյ զերկայնութիւն միոյ սիւնակին առնիցես։ եւ ՚ի միոջէ կանգնոյ եւ ՚ի կիսոյ
16 Ամէն մոյթի երկարութիւնը տասը կանգուն թող լինի, իսկ ամէն մոյթի հաստութիւնն ու լայնութիւնը մէկուկէս կանգուն թող լինի:
16 Մէկ տախտակին երկայնութիւնը տասը կանգուն եւ լայնութիւնը մէկ ու կէս կանգուն պէտք է ըլլայ։
Ի տասն կանգնոյ զերկայնութիւն միոյ [361]սիւնակին առնիցես, եւ ի միոջէ կանգնոյ եւ ի կիսոյ [362]զթանձրութիւն եւ`` զլայնութիւն միոյ [363]սիւնակին:

26:16: կանգնաւորս. ՚ի տա՛սն կանգնոյ զերկայնութիւն միոյ սիւնակին առնիցես։ եւ ՚ի միոջէ կանգնոյ եւ ՚ի կիսոյ
16 Ամէն մոյթի երկարութիւնը տասը կանգուն թող լինի, իսկ ամէն մոյթի հաստութիւնն ու լայնութիւնը մէկուկէս կանգուն թող լինի:
16 Մէկ տախտակին երկայնութիւնը տասը կանգուն եւ լայնութիւնը մէկ ու կէս կանգուն պէտք է ըլլայ։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
26:1616: длиною в десять локтей брус, и полтора локтя каждому брусу ширина;
26:16 δέκα δεκα ten πήχεων πηχυς forearm; foot and a half ποιήσεις ποιεω do; make τὸν ο the στῦλον στυλος pillar τὸν ο the ἕνα εις.1 one; unit καὶ και and; even πήχεος πηχυς forearm; foot and a half ἑνὸς εις.1 one; unit καὶ και and; even ἡμίσους ημισυς half τὸ ο the πλάτος πλατος breadth τοῦ ο the στύλου στυλος pillar τοῦ ο the ἑνός εις.1 one; unit
26:16 עֶ֥שֶׂר ʕˌeśer עֶשֶׂר ten אַמֹּ֖ות ʔammˌôṯ אַמָּה cubit אֹ֣רֶךְ ʔˈōreḵ אֹרֶךְ length הַ ha הַ the קָּ֑רֶשׁ qqˈāreš קֶרֶשׁ board וְ wᵊ וְ and אַמָּה֙ ʔammˌā אַמָּה cubit וַ wa וְ and חֲצִ֣י ḥᵃṣˈî חֲצִי half הָֽ hˈā הַ the אַמָּ֔ה ʔammˈā אַמָּה cubit רֹ֖חַב rˌōḥav רֹחַב breadth הַ ha הַ the קֶּ֥רֶשׁ qqˌereš קֶרֶשׁ board הָ hā הַ the אֶחָֽד׃ ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one
26:16. quae singulae denos cubitos in longitudine habeant et in latitudine singulos ac semissemLet every one of them be ten cubits in length, and in breadth one cubit and a half.
16. Ten cubits shall be the length of a board, and a cubit and a half the breadth of each board.
Ten cubits [shall be] the length of a board, and a cubit and a half [shall be] the breadth of one board:

16: длиною в десять локтей брус, и полтора локтя каждому брусу ширина;
26:16
δέκα δεκα ten
πήχεων πηχυς forearm; foot and a half
ποιήσεις ποιεω do; make
τὸν ο the
στῦλον στυλος pillar
τὸν ο the
ἕνα εις.1 one; unit
καὶ και and; even
πήχεος πηχυς forearm; foot and a half
ἑνὸς εις.1 one; unit
καὶ και and; even
ἡμίσους ημισυς half
τὸ ο the
πλάτος πλατος breadth
τοῦ ο the
στύλου στυλος pillar
τοῦ ο the
ἑνός εις.1 one; unit
26:16
עֶ֥שֶׂר ʕˌeśer עֶשֶׂר ten
אַמֹּ֖ות ʔammˌôṯ אַמָּה cubit
אֹ֣רֶךְ ʔˈōreḵ אֹרֶךְ length
הַ ha הַ the
קָּ֑רֶשׁ qqˈāreš קֶרֶשׁ board
וְ wᵊ וְ and
אַמָּה֙ ʔammˌā אַמָּה cubit
וַ wa וְ and
חֲצִ֣י ḥᵃṣˈî חֲצִי half
הָֽ hˈā הַ the
אַמָּ֔ה ʔammˈā אַמָּה cubit
רֹ֖חַב rˌōḥav רֹחַב breadth
הַ ha הַ the
קֶּ֥רֶשׁ qqˌereš קֶרֶשׁ board
הָ הַ the
אֶחָֽד׃ ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one
26:16. quae singulae denos cubitos in longitudine habeant et in latitudine singulos ac semissem
Let every one of them be ten cubits in length, and in breadth one cubit and a half.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jg▾ ab▾ ac▾ all ▾
Adam Clarke: Commentary on the Bible - 1831
26:16: Ten cubits shall be the length of a board - Each of these boards or planks was about five yards and two feet and a half long, and thirty-two inches broad; and as they are said to be standing up, this was the Height of the tabernacle. The length being thirty cubits, twenty boards, one cubit and a half broad each, make about seventeen yards and a half, and the Breadth was about five yards.
Albert Barnes: Notes on the Bible - 1834
26:16
The board would therefore be about 15 ft. long, and 27 in. broad.
John Gill
26:16 Ten cubits shall be the length of a board,.... Or five yards, according to the common cubit:
and a cubit and a half shall be the breadth of one board; or three quarters of a yard; and from hence we may learn what were the height and the length of the tabernacle; according to the common computation of a cubit, it was but five yards high and fifteen long, since there were but twenty boards on each side, Ex 26:18, but if three inches are added to each cubit, it will make its measures considerably larger: Josephus (q) says the boards were four fingers thick: according to Bishop Cumberland the boards of the tabernacle, containing fifteen Jewish square cubits, were very near fifty English square feet in their length and breadth.
(q) Antiqu. l. 3. c. 6. sect. 3.
26:1726:17: զթանձրութիւն եւ զլայնութիւն միոյ սիւնակին։ Եւ երկուս սփռիչս միում սիւնակի, ագուցեալ ընդ միմեանս. ա՛յնպէս արասցես ամենայն սիւնակաց խորանին։
17 Ամէն մի մոյթ թող ունենայ իրար ագուցուած երկու ծղնի: Այդպէս կը պատրաստես վրանի բոլոր մոյթերը:
17 Ամէն մէկ տախտակը երկերկու ագուցիկ ծայրեր թող ունենայ՝ իրարու յարմարած։ Խորանին բոլոր տախտակները նոյնպէս ըլլան։
Եւ երկուս [364]սփռիչս միում [365]սիւնակի` [366]ագուցեալ ընդ միմեանս``. այնպէս արասցես ամենայն [367]սիւնակաց խորանին:

26:17: զթանձրութիւն եւ զլայնութիւն միոյ սիւնակին։ Եւ երկուս սփռիչս միում սիւնակի, ագուցեալ ընդ միմեանս. ա՛յնպէս արասցես ամենայն սիւնակաց խորանին։
17 Ամէն մի մոյթ թող ունենայ իրար ագուցուած երկու ծղնի: Այդպէս կը պատրաստես վրանի բոլոր մոյթերը:
17 Ամէն մէկ տախտակը երկերկու ագուցիկ ծայրեր թող ունենայ՝ իրարու յարմարած։ Խորանին բոլոր տախտակները նոյնպէս ըլլան։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
26:1717: у каждого бруса по два шипа: один против другого: так сделай у всех брусьев скинии.
26:17 δύο δυο two ἀγκωνίσκους αγκωνισκος the στύλῳ στυλος pillar τῷ ο the ἑνὶ εις.1 one; unit ἀντιπίπτοντας αντιπιπτω fall against; resist ἕτερον ετερος different; alternate τῷ ο the ἑτέρῳ ετερος different; alternate οὕτως ουτως so; this way ποιήσεις ποιεω do; make πᾶσι πας all; every τοῖς ο the στύλοις στυλος pillar τῆς ο the σκηνῆς σκηνη tent
26:17 שְׁתֵּ֣י šᵊttˈê שְׁנַיִם two יָדֹ֗ות yāḏˈôṯ יָד hand לַ la לְ to † הַ the קֶּ֨רֶשׁ֙ qqˈereš קֶרֶשׁ board הָ hā הַ the אֶחָ֔ד ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one מְשֻׁלָּבֹ֔ת mᵊšullāvˈōṯ שׁלב bind אִשָּׁ֖ה ʔiššˌā אִשָּׁה woman אֶל־ ʔel- אֶל to אֲחֹתָ֑הּ ʔᵃḥōṯˈāh אָחֹות sister כֵּ֣ן kˈēn כֵּן thus תַּעֲשֶׂ֔ה taʕᵃśˈeh עשׂה make לְ lᵊ לְ to כֹ֖ל ḵˌōl כֹּל whole קַרְשֵׁ֥י qaršˌê קֶרֶשׁ board הַ ha הַ the מִּשְׁכָּֽן׃ mmiškˈān מִשְׁכָּן dwelling-place
26:17. in lateribus tabulae duae incastraturae fient quibus tabula alteri tabulae conectatur atque in hunc modum cunctae tabulae parabunturIn the sides of the boards shall be made two mortises, whereby one board may be joined to another board: and after this manner shall all the boards be prepared.
17. Two tenons shall there be in each board, joined one to another: thus shalt thou make for all the boards of the tabernacle.
Two tenons [shall there be] in one board, set in order one against another: thus shalt thou make for all the boards of the tabernacle:

17: у каждого бруса по два шипа: один против другого: так сделай у всех брусьев скинии.
26:17
δύο δυο two
ἀγκωνίσκους αγκωνισκος the
στύλῳ στυλος pillar
τῷ ο the
ἑνὶ εις.1 one; unit
ἀντιπίπτοντας αντιπιπτω fall against; resist
ἕτερον ετερος different; alternate
τῷ ο the
ἑτέρῳ ετερος different; alternate
οὕτως ουτως so; this way
ποιήσεις ποιεω do; make
πᾶσι πας all; every
τοῖς ο the
στύλοις στυλος pillar
τῆς ο the
σκηνῆς σκηνη tent
26:17
שְׁתֵּ֣י šᵊttˈê שְׁנַיִם two
יָדֹ֗ות yāḏˈôṯ יָד hand
לַ la לְ to
הַ the
קֶּ֨רֶשׁ֙ qqˈereš קֶרֶשׁ board
הָ הַ the
אֶחָ֔ד ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one
מְשֻׁלָּבֹ֔ת mᵊšullāvˈōṯ שׁלב bind
אִשָּׁ֖ה ʔiššˌā אִשָּׁה woman
אֶל־ ʔel- אֶל to
אֲחֹתָ֑הּ ʔᵃḥōṯˈāh אָחֹות sister
כֵּ֣ן kˈēn כֵּן thus
תַּעֲשֶׂ֔ה taʕᵃśˈeh עשׂה make
לְ lᵊ לְ to
כֹ֖ל ḵˌōl כֹּל whole
קַרְשֵׁ֥י qaršˌê קֶרֶשׁ board
הַ ha הַ the
מִּשְׁכָּֽן׃ mmiškˈān מִשְׁכָּן dwelling-place
26:17. in lateribus tabulae duae incastraturae fient quibus tabula alteri tabulae conectatur atque in hunc modum cunctae tabulae parabuntur
In the sides of the boards shall be made two mortises, whereby one board may be joined to another board: and after this manner shall all the boards be prepared.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jg▾ kad▾ tr▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
17: Каждый брус оканчивался внизу двумя «йодот» — ручками, двумя шипами.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
26:17: tenons: Heb. hands, Exo 26:19, Exo 36:22, Exo 36:24
Carl Friedrich Keil and Franz Delitzsch
26:17
Every board was to have two ידות (lit., hands or holders) to hold them upright, pegs therefore; and they were to be "bound to one another" (משׁלּב, from שׁלב in Chald. to connect, hence שׁלבּים in 3Kings 7:28, the corner plates that hold together the four sides of a chest), not "pegged into one another," but joined together by a fastening dovetailed into the pegs, by which the latter were fastened still more firmly to the boards, and therefore had greater holding power than if each one had been simply sunk into the edge of the board.
John Gill
26:17 Two tenons shall there be on one board,.... Every board was to be so cut and shaped at the lower end of it, as to have, as it were, "two hands" (r), as in the original, to enter into, lay hold on, and fasten in mortises:
set in order one against another; at a proper distance from each other, as the rounds of a ladder:
thus shalt thou make for all the boards of the tabernacle; everyone was to have two tenons.
(r) "duae manus", Montanus.
26:1826:18: Եւ արասցես քսան սիւնակս խորանին ՚ի հիւսւսոյ կողմանէ։
18 Վրանի հիւսիսային կողմում կը դնես քսան մոյթեր
18 Խորանին տախտակներ շինէ՛։ Հարաւային կողմը քսան տախտակ շինէ՛։
Եւ [368]արասցես քսան սիւնակս խորանին ի հիւսիսոյ կողմանէ:

26:18: Եւ արասցես քսան սիւնակս խորանին ՚ի հիւսւսոյ կողմանէ։
18 Վրանի հիւսիսային կողմում կը դնես քսան մոյթեր
18 Խորանին տախտակներ շինէ՛։ Հարաւային կողմը քսան տախտակ շինէ՛։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
26:1818: Так сделай брусья для скинии: двадцать брусьев для полуденной стороны к югу,
26:18 καὶ και and; even ποιήσεις ποιεω do; make στύλους στυλος pillar τῇ ο the σκηνῇ σκηνη tent εἴκοσι εικοσι twenty στύλους στυλος pillar ἐκ εκ from; out of τοῦ ο the κλίτους κλιτος the πρὸς προς to; toward βορρᾶν βορρας north wind
26:18 וְ wᵊ וְ and עָשִׂ֥יתָ ʕāśˌîṯā עשׂה make אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] הַ ha הַ the קְּרָשִׁ֖ים qqᵊrāšˌîm קֶרֶשׁ board לַ la לְ to † הַ the מִּשְׁכָּ֑ן mmiškˈān מִשְׁכָּן dwelling-place עֶשְׂרִ֣ים ʕeśrˈîm עֶשְׂרִים twenty קֶ֔רֶשׁ qˈereš קֶרֶשׁ board לִ li לְ to פְאַ֖ת fᵊʔˌaṯ פֵּאָה corner נֶ֥גְבָּה nˌeḡbā נֶגֶב south תֵימָֽנָה׃ ṯêmˈānā תֵּימָן south
26:18. quarum viginti erunt in latere meridiano quod vergit ad austrumOf which twenty shall be in the south side southward.
18. And thou shalt make the boards for the tabernacle, twenty boards for the south side southward.
And thou shalt make the boards for the tabernacle, twenty boards on the south side southward:

18: Так сделай брусья для скинии: двадцать брусьев для полуденной стороны к югу,
26:18
καὶ και and; even
ποιήσεις ποιεω do; make
στύλους στυλος pillar
τῇ ο the
σκηνῇ σκηνη tent
εἴκοσι εικοσι twenty
στύλους στυλος pillar
ἐκ εκ from; out of
τοῦ ο the
κλίτους κλιτος the
πρὸς προς to; toward
βορρᾶν βορρας north wind
26:18
וְ wᵊ וְ and
עָשִׂ֥יתָ ʕāśˌîṯā עשׂה make
אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker]
הַ ha הַ the
קְּרָשִׁ֖ים qqᵊrāšˌîm קֶרֶשׁ board
לַ la לְ to
הַ the
מִּשְׁכָּ֑ן mmiškˈān מִשְׁכָּן dwelling-place
עֶשְׂרִ֣ים ʕeśrˈîm עֶשְׂרִים twenty
קֶ֔רֶשׁ qˈereš קֶרֶשׁ board
לִ li לְ to
פְאַ֖ת fᵊʔˌaṯ פֵּאָה corner
נֶ֥גְבָּה nˌeḡbā נֶגֶב south
תֵימָֽנָה׃ ṯêmˈānā תֵּימָן south
26:18. quarum viginti erunt in latere meridiano quod vergit ad austrum
Of which twenty shall be in the south side southward.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jg▾ kad▾ ab▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
18-21: Для продольных, северной и южной, сторон скинии назначено сорок брусьев, по двадцати на каждую. Так как ширина каждого бруса была полтора локтя, то из плотно приставленных друг к другу брусьев должна была получиться сплошная стена в тридцать локтей длины. Каждому шипу соответствовала особая подставка с отверстием, сделанным по мерке шипа, в которое он и вставлялся, как в свое основание. Благодаря этому столбы получали известную долю устойчивости. Подставы столбов скинии отличались от подстав двора тем, что были не медные, а серебряные, и на каждую из них пошло по таланту серебра (Исх 38:27). Форма их неизвестна.
Albert Barnes: Notes on the Bible - 1834
26:18
The entire length of the structure was about 45 ft. in the clear, and its width about 15 ft.
The south side southward - Or, the south side on the right. As the entrance of the tabernacle was at its east end, the south side, to a person entering it, would be on the left hand: but we learn from Josephus that it was usual, in speaking of the temple, to identify the south with the right hand and the north with the left hand, the entrance being regarded as the face of the structure and the west end as its back.
Carl Friedrich Keil and Franz Delitzsch
26:18
Twenty of these boards were to be prepared for the side of the dwelling that was turned towards the south, and forty sockets (אדנים foundations, Job 38:6) or bases for the pegs, i.e., to put the pegs of the boards into, that the boards might stand upright; and the same number of boards and sockets for the north side. תּימנה, "southward," is added to נגבּה לפאת in Ex 26:18, to give a clearer definition of negeb, which primarily means the dry, and then the country to the south; an evident proof that at that time negeb was not established as a geographical term for the south, and therefore that it was not written here by a Palestinian, as Knobel supposes, but by Moses in the desert.
The form of the "sockets" is not explained, and even in Ex 38:27, in the summing up of the gifts presented for the work, it is merely stated that a talent of silver (about 93 lb.) was applied to every socket.
John Gill
26:18 And thou shalt make the boards for the tabernacle,.... As in the manner before described, so in number as follows:
twenty boards on the south side southward; which being a cubit and a half broad, made the length of the tabernacle fifteen yards according to the common account; but if these were cubits of twenty one inches, then its length was much greater.
26:1926:19: Եւ քառասուն խարիսխս արծաթիս արասցես քսանեցունց սեանց։ երկու խարիսխք առ մի սիւն յերկոցունց կողմանց. եւ երկու խարիսխք առ մի սիւն յերկոցունց կողմանց խորանին[730]։ [730] Յօրինակին. Եւ քսան խարիսխս ար՛՛։ ՚Ի լուս՛՛. Երկու սարիսխք առ։
19 եւ այդ քսան մոյթերի համար կը պատրաստես քառասուն արծաթէ խարիսխներ. երկու խարիսխ՝ վրանի մի մոյթի երկու կողմերի համար եւ երկու խարիսխ՝ մի մոյթի երկու կողմերի համար:
19 Եւ տախտակներուն տակ քառասուն արծաթ խարիսխ շինէ՛։ Մէկ տախտակին տակ իր երկու ագուցիկ ծայրը անցընելու համար երկու խարիսխ եւ միւս տախտակին տակ իր երկու ծայրը անցընելու համար երկու խարիսխ պէտք է ըլլայ։
Եւ քառասուն խարիսխս արծաթիս արասցես [369]քսանեցունց սեանցն``. երկու խարիսխք [370]առ մի սիւն յերկոցունց կողմանց``, եւ երկու խարիսխք [371]առ մի սիւն յերկոցունց կողմանց խորանին:

26:19: Եւ քառասուն խարիսխս արծաթիս արասցես քսանեցունց սեանց։ երկու խարիսխք առ մի սիւն յերկոցունց կողմանց. եւ երկու խարիսխք առ մի սիւն յերկոցունց կողմանց խորանին[730]։
[730] Յօրինակին. Եւ քսան խարիսխս ար՛՛։ ՚Ի լուս՛՛. Երկու սարիսխք առ։
19 եւ այդ քսան մոյթերի համար կը պատրաստես քառասուն արծաթէ խարիսխներ. երկու խարիսխ՝ վրանի մի մոյթի երկու կողմերի համար եւ երկու խարիսխ՝ մի մոյթի երկու կողմերի համար:
19 Եւ տախտակներուն տակ քառասուն արծաթ խարիսխ շինէ՛։ Մէկ տախտակին տակ իր երկու ագուցիկ ծայրը անցընելու համար երկու խարիսխ եւ միւս տախտակին տակ իր երկու ծայրը անցընելու համար երկու խարիսխ պէտք է ըլլայ։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
26:1919: и под двадцать брусьев сделай сорок серебряных подножий: два подножия под один брус для двух шипов его, и два подножия под другой брус для двух шипов его;
26:19 καὶ και and; even τεσσαράκοντα τεσσαρακοντα forty βάσεις βασις sole of the foot ἀργυρᾶς αργυρεος of silver ποιήσεις ποιεω do; make τοῖς ο the εἴκοσι εικοσι twenty στύλοις στυλος pillar δύο δυο two βάσεις βασις sole of the foot τῷ ο the στύλῳ στυλος pillar τῷ ο the ἑνὶ εις.1 one; unit εἰς εις into; for ἀμφότερα αμφοτερος both τὰ ο the μέρη μερος part; in particular αὐτοῦ αυτος he; him καὶ και and; even δύο δυο two βάσεις βασις sole of the foot τῷ ο the στύλῳ στυλος pillar τῷ ο the ἑνὶ εις.1 one; unit εἰς εις into; for ἀμφότερα αμφοτερος both τὰ ο the μέρη μερος part; in particular αὐτοῦ αυτος he; him
26:19 וְ wᵊ וְ and אַרְבָּעִים֙ ʔarbāʕîm אַרְבַּע four אַדְנֵי־ ʔaḏnê- אֶדֶן pedestal כֶ֔סֶף ḵˈesef כֶּסֶף silver תַּעֲשֶׂ֕ה taʕᵃśˈeh עשׂה make תַּ֖חַת tˌaḥaṯ תַּחַת under part עֶשְׂרִ֣ים ʕeśrˈîm עֶשְׂרִים twenty הַ ha הַ the קָּ֑רֶשׁ qqˈāreš קֶרֶשׁ board שְׁנֵ֨י šᵊnˌê שְׁנַיִם two אֲדָנִ֜ים ʔᵃḏānˈîm אֶדֶן pedestal תַּֽחַת־ tˈaḥaṯ- תַּחַת under part הַ ha הַ the קֶּ֤רֶשׁ qqˈereš קֶרֶשׁ board הָ hā הַ the אֶחָד֙ ʔeḥˌāḏ אֶחָד one לִ li לְ to שְׁתֵּ֣י šᵊttˈê שְׁנַיִם two יְדֹתָ֔יו yᵊḏōṯˈāʸw יָד hand וּ û וְ and שְׁנֵ֧י šᵊnˈê שְׁנַיִם two אֲדָנִ֛ים ʔᵃḏānˈîm אֶדֶן pedestal תַּֽחַת־ tˈaḥaṯ- תַּחַת under part הַ ha הַ the קֶּ֥רֶשׁ qqˌereš קֶרֶשׁ board הָ hā הַ the אֶחָ֖ד ʔeḥˌāḏ אֶחָד one לִ li לְ to שְׁתֵּ֥י šᵊttˌê שְׁנַיִם two יְדֹתָֽיו׃ yᵊḏōṯˈāʸw יָד hand
26:19. quibus quadraginta bases argenteas fundes ut binae bases singulis tabulis per duos angulos subicianturFor which thou shalt cast forty sockets of silver, that under every board may be put two sockets at the two corners.
19. And thou shalt make forty sockets of silver under the twenty boards; two sockets under one board for its two tenons, and two sockets under another board for its two tenons:
And thou shalt make forty sockets of silver under the twenty boards; two sockets under one board for his two tenons, and two sockets under another board for his two tenons:

19: и под двадцать брусьев сделай сорок серебряных подножий: два подножия под один брус для двух шипов его, и два подножия под другой брус для двух шипов его;
26:19
καὶ και and; even
τεσσαράκοντα τεσσαρακοντα forty
βάσεις βασις sole of the foot
ἀργυρᾶς αργυρεος of silver
ποιήσεις ποιεω do; make
τοῖς ο the
εἴκοσι εικοσι twenty
στύλοις στυλος pillar
δύο δυο two
βάσεις βασις sole of the foot
τῷ ο the
στύλῳ στυλος pillar
τῷ ο the
ἑνὶ εις.1 one; unit
εἰς εις into; for
ἀμφότερα αμφοτερος both
τὰ ο the
μέρη μερος part; in particular
αὐτοῦ αυτος he; him
καὶ και and; even
δύο δυο two
βάσεις βασις sole of the foot
τῷ ο the
στύλῳ στυλος pillar
τῷ ο the
ἑνὶ εις.1 one; unit
εἰς εις into; for
ἀμφότερα αμφοτερος both
τὰ ο the
μέρη μερος part; in particular
αὐτοῦ αυτος he; him
26:19
וְ wᵊ וְ and
אַרְבָּעִים֙ ʔarbāʕîm אַרְבַּע four
אַדְנֵי־ ʔaḏnê- אֶדֶן pedestal
כֶ֔סֶף ḵˈesef כֶּסֶף silver
תַּעֲשֶׂ֕ה taʕᵃśˈeh עשׂה make
תַּ֖חַת tˌaḥaṯ תַּחַת under part
עֶשְׂרִ֣ים ʕeśrˈîm עֶשְׂרִים twenty
הַ ha הַ the
קָּ֑רֶשׁ qqˈāreš קֶרֶשׁ board
שְׁנֵ֨י šᵊnˌê שְׁנַיִם two
אֲדָנִ֜ים ʔᵃḏānˈîm אֶדֶן pedestal
תַּֽחַת־ tˈaḥaṯ- תַּחַת under part
הַ ha הַ the
קֶּ֤רֶשׁ qqˈereš קֶרֶשׁ board
הָ הַ the
אֶחָד֙ ʔeḥˌāḏ אֶחָד one
לִ li לְ to
שְׁתֵּ֣י šᵊttˈê שְׁנַיִם two
יְדֹתָ֔יו yᵊḏōṯˈāʸw יָד hand
וּ û וְ and
שְׁנֵ֧י šᵊnˈê שְׁנַיִם two
אֲדָנִ֛ים ʔᵃḏānˈîm אֶדֶן pedestal
תַּֽחַת־ tˈaḥaṯ- תַּחַת under part
הַ ha הַ the
קֶּ֥רֶשׁ qqˌereš קֶרֶשׁ board
הָ הַ the
אֶחָ֖ד ʔeḥˌāḏ אֶחָד one
לִ li לְ to
שְׁתֵּ֥י šᵊttˌê שְׁנַיִם two
יְדֹתָֽיו׃ yᵊḏōṯˈāʸw יָד hand
26:19. quibus quadraginta bases argenteas fundes ut binae bases singulis tabulis per duos angulos subiciantur
For which thou shalt cast forty sockets of silver, that under every board may be put two sockets at the two corners.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jg▾ tr▾ ab▾ all ▾
Albert Barnes: Notes on the Bible - 1834
26:19
Sockets - More literally, bases, or foundations. Each base weighed a talent, that is, about 94 lbs. (see Exo 38:27), and must have been a massive block. The bases formed a continuous foundation for the walls of boards, presenting a succession of sockets or mortices (each base having a single socket), into which the tenons were to fit. They served not only for ornament but also for the protection of the lower ends of the boards from the decay which would have resulted from contact with the ground.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
26:19: forty sockets of silver: Exo 26:25, Exo 26:37, Exo 27:10, Exo 27:12-18, Exo 36:24-26, Exo 38:27, Exo 38:30, Exo 38:31, Exo 40:18; Num 3:36; Num 4:31, Num 4:32; Sol 5:15
John Gill
26:19 And thou shall make forty sockets of silver under the twenty boards,.... Or bases (s), and which were properly the foundation of the tabernacle, on which it was settled and established; these sockets were the mortises for the two tenons of each board or plank to be placed in, and were as broad as the plank, and, joining each other, made one entire basis for the whole structure; each socket contained a talent of silver, and was made of the silver given at the numbering of the people, Ex 38:25, and a talent of silver, according to Bishop Cumberland, amounted to three hundred and fifty three pounds, eleven shillings and some odd pence of our money: by which may be judged the whole value of this silver foundation, which, with the four sockets of the vail, consisted of one hundred of them, which answer to the one hundred talents of silver collected at the above offering:
two sockets under one board for his two tenons, and two sockets under another board for his two tenons; and so in all the twenty boards, which took up the whole forty on the south side.
(s) "bases", V. L. Pagninus, Montanus, Tigurine version, Piscator, Drusius.
26:2026:20: Եւ յերկրորդէ կողմանէ խորանին ընդ հարաւ քսան սիւն.
20 Վրանի միւս՝ հարաւային կողմում նոյնպէս կը դնես քսան մոյթեր իրենց քառասուն արծաթէ խարիսխներով:
20 Խորանին միւս կողմին համար՝ հիւսիսային կողմը՝ քսան տախտակ,
Եւ յերկրորդէ կողմանէ խորանին ընդ [372]հարաւ քսան սիւն:

26:20: Եւ յերկրորդէ կողմանէ խորանին ընդ հարաւ քսան սիւն.
20 Վրանի միւս՝ հարաւային կողմում նոյնպէս կը դնես քսան մոյթեր իրենց քառասուն արծաթէ խարիսխներով:
20 Խորանին միւս կողմին համար՝ հիւսիսային կողմը՝ քսան տախտակ,
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
26:2020: и двадцать брусьев для другой стороны скинии к северу,
26:20 καὶ και and; even τὸ ο the κλίτος κλιτος the δεύτερον δευτερος second τὸ ο the πρὸς προς to; toward νότον νοτος south wind εἴκοσι εικοσι twenty στύλους στυλος pillar
26:20 וּ û וְ and לְ lᵊ לְ to צֶ֧לַע ṣˈelaʕ צֵלָע side הַ ha הַ the מִּשְׁכָּ֛ן mmiškˈān מִשְׁכָּן dwelling-place הַ ha הַ the שֵּׁנִ֖ית ššēnˌîṯ שֵׁנִי second לִ li לְ to פְאַ֣ת fᵊʔˈaṯ פֵּאָה corner צָפֹ֑ון ṣāfˈôn צָפֹון north עֶשְׂרִ֖ים ʕeśrˌîm עֶשְׂרִים twenty קָֽרֶשׁ׃ qˈāreš קֶרֶשׁ board
26:20. in latere quoque secundo tabernaculi quod vergit ad aquilonem viginti tabulae eruntIn the second side also of the tabernacle that looketh to the north, there shall be twenty boards,
20. and for the second side of the tabernacle, on the north side, twenty boards:
And for the second side of the tabernacle on the north side [there shall be] twenty boards:

20: и двадцать брусьев для другой стороны скинии к северу,
26:20
καὶ και and; even
τὸ ο the
κλίτος κλιτος the
δεύτερον δευτερος second
τὸ ο the
πρὸς προς to; toward
νότον νοτος south wind
εἴκοσι εικοσι twenty
στύλους στυλος pillar
26:20
וּ û וְ and
לְ lᵊ לְ to
צֶ֧לַע ṣˈelaʕ צֵלָע side
הַ ha הַ the
מִּשְׁכָּ֛ן mmiškˈān מִשְׁכָּן dwelling-place
הַ ha הַ the
שֵּׁנִ֖ית ššēnˌîṯ שֵׁנִי second
לִ li לְ to
פְאַ֣ת fᵊʔˈaṯ פֵּאָה corner
צָפֹ֑ון ṣāfˈôn צָפֹון north
עֶשְׂרִ֖ים ʕeśrˌîm עֶשְׂרִים twenty
קָֽרֶשׁ׃ qˈāreš קֶרֶשׁ board
26:20. in latere quoque secundo tabernaculi quod vergit ad aquilonem viginti tabulae erunt
In the second side also of the tabernacle that looketh to the north, there shall be twenty boards,
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jg▾ all ▾
John Gill
26:20 And for the second side of the tabernacle the north side,.... The direction of the tabernacle was east and west; at the east end was the entrance into the holy place, and at the west end the holy of holies; and the two sides were north and south; and as on the south side, so on the north
there shall be twenty boards: just the same number as the laws of building required.
26:2126:21: եւ քառասուն խարիսխք նոցա արծաթիք. երկո՛ւ խարիսխք առ մի սիւն յերկոցունց կողմանց։
21 Երկու խարիսխ՝ մի մոյթի երկու կողմերի համար:
21 Անոնց քառասուն արծաթ խարիսխներ։ Մէկ տախտակին տակ երկու խարիսխ ու միւս տախտակին տակ երկու խարիսխ շինէ՛։
եւ քառասուն խարիսխք նոցա արծաթիք. երկու խարիսխք [373]առ մի սիւն յերկոցունց կողմանց:

26:21: եւ քառասուն խարիսխք նոցա արծաթիք. երկո՛ւ խարիսխք առ մի սիւն յերկոցունց կողմանց։
21 Երկու խարիսխ՝ մի մոյթի երկու կողմերի համար:
21 Անոնց քառասուն արծաթ խարիսխներ։ Մէկ տախտակին տակ երկու խարիսխ ու միւս տախտակին տակ երկու խարիսխ շինէ՛։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
26:2121: и для них сорок подножий серебряных: два подножия под один брус, и два подножия под другой брус.
26:21 καὶ και and; even τεσσαράκοντα τεσσαρακοντα forty βάσεις βασις sole of the foot αὐτῶν αυτος he; him ἀργυρᾶς αργυρεος of silver δύο δυο two βάσεις βασις sole of the foot τῷ ο the στύλῳ στυλος pillar τῷ ο the ἑνὶ εις.1 one; unit εἰς εις into; for ἀμφότερα αμφοτερος both τὰ ο the μέρη μερος part; in particular αὐτοῦ αυτος he; him καὶ και and; even δύο δυο two βάσεις βασις sole of the foot τῷ ο the στύλῳ στυλος pillar τῷ ο the ἑνὶ εις.1 one; unit εἰς εις into; for ἀμφότερα αμφοτερος both τὰ ο the μέρη μερος part; in particular αὐτοῦ αυτος he; him
26:21 וְ wᵊ וְ and אַרְבָּעִ֥ים ʔarbāʕˌîm אַרְבַּע four אַדְנֵיהֶ֖ם ʔaḏnêhˌem אֶדֶן pedestal כָּ֑סֶף kˈāsef כֶּסֶף silver שְׁנֵ֣י šᵊnˈê שְׁנַיִם two אֲדָנִ֗ים ʔᵃḏānˈîm אֶדֶן pedestal תַּ֚חַת ˈtaḥaṯ תַּחַת under part הַ ha הַ the קֶּ֣רֶשׁ qqˈereš קֶרֶשׁ board הָֽ hˈā הַ the אֶחָ֔ד ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one וּ û וְ and שְׁנֵ֣י šᵊnˈê שְׁנַיִם two אֲדָנִ֔ים ʔᵃḏānˈîm אֶדֶן pedestal תַּ֖חַת tˌaḥaṯ תַּחַת under part הַ ha הַ the קֶּ֥רֶשׁ qqˌereš קֶרֶשׁ board הָ hā הַ the אֶחָֽד׃ ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one
26:21. quadraginta habentes bases argenteas binae bases singulis tabulis subponenturHaving forty sockets of silver, two sockets shall be put under each board.
21. and their forty sockets of silver; two sockets under one board, and two sockets under another board.
And their forty sockets [of] silver; two sockets under one board, and two sockets under another board:

21: и для них сорок подножий серебряных: два подножия под один брус, и два подножия под другой брус.
26:21
καὶ και and; even
τεσσαράκοντα τεσσαρακοντα forty
βάσεις βασις sole of the foot
αὐτῶν αυτος he; him
ἀργυρᾶς αργυρεος of silver
δύο δυο two
βάσεις βασις sole of the foot
τῷ ο the
στύλῳ στυλος pillar
τῷ ο the
ἑνὶ εις.1 one; unit
εἰς εις into; for
ἀμφότερα αμφοτερος both
τὰ ο the
μέρη μερος part; in particular
αὐτοῦ αυτος he; him
καὶ και and; even
δύο δυο two
βάσεις βασις sole of the foot
τῷ ο the
στύλῳ στυλος pillar
τῷ ο the
ἑνὶ εις.1 one; unit
εἰς εις into; for
ἀμφότερα αμφοτερος both
τὰ ο the
μέρη μερος part; in particular
αὐτοῦ αυτος he; him
26:21
וְ wᵊ וְ and
אַרְבָּעִ֥ים ʔarbāʕˌîm אַרְבַּע four
אַדְנֵיהֶ֖ם ʔaḏnêhˌem אֶדֶן pedestal
כָּ֑סֶף kˈāsef כֶּסֶף silver
שְׁנֵ֣י šᵊnˈê שְׁנַיִם two
אֲדָנִ֗ים ʔᵃḏānˈîm אֶדֶן pedestal
תַּ֚חַת ˈtaḥaṯ תַּחַת under part
הַ ha הַ the
קֶּ֣רֶשׁ qqˈereš קֶרֶשׁ board
הָֽ hˈā הַ the
אֶחָ֔ד ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one
וּ û וְ and
שְׁנֵ֣י šᵊnˈê שְׁנַיִם two
אֲדָנִ֔ים ʔᵃḏānˈîm אֶדֶן pedestal
תַּ֖חַת tˌaḥaṯ תַּחַת under part
הַ ha הַ the
קֶּ֥רֶשׁ qqˌereš קֶרֶשׁ board
הָ הַ the
אֶחָֽד׃ ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one
26:21. quadraginta habentes bases argenteas binae bases singulis tabulis subponentur
Having forty sockets of silver, two sockets shall be put under each board.
21. and their forty sockets of silver; two sockets under one board, and two sockets under another board.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jg▾ tr▾ all ▾
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
26:21: two sockets under one board: Exo 26:19
John Gill
26:21 And their forty sockets of silver,.... answerable to the twenty boards, for their two tenons to be placed in as in mortises: two sockets under one board, and two sockets under another board; and so under all the boards on the north side as on the south.
26:2226:22: Եւ յետուստ խորանին ՚ի ծովակողմն կուսէ արասցես վե՛ց սիւն։
22 Վրանի յետեւի՝ ծովահայեաց կողմում վեց մոյթ կը դնես:
22 Խորանին ետեւի կողմին համար՝ արեւմտեան կողմը վեց տախտակ շինէ՛։
Եւ յետուստ խորանին [374]ի ծովակողմն կուսէ`` արասցես վեց [375]սիւն:

26:22: Եւ յետուստ խորանին ՚ի ծովակողմն կուսէ արասցես վե՛ց սիւն։
22 Վրանի յետեւի՝ ծովահայեաց կողմում վեց մոյթ կը դնես:
22 Խորանին ետեւի կողմին համար՝ արեւմտեան կողմը վեց տախտակ շինէ՛։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
26:2222: для задней же стороны скинии к западу сделай шесть брусьев
26:22 καὶ και and; even ἐκ εκ from; out of τῶν ο the ὀπίσω οπισω in back; after τῆς ο the σκηνῆς σκηνη tent κατὰ κατα down; by τὸ ο the μέρος μερος part; in particular τὸ ο the πρὸς προς to; toward θάλασσαν θαλασσα sea ποιήσεις ποιεω do; make ἓξ εξ six στύλους στυλος pillar
26:22 וּֽ ˈû וְ and לְ lᵊ לְ to יַרְכְּתֵ֥י yarkᵊṯˌê יַרְכָּה backside הַ ha הַ the מִּשְׁכָּ֖ן mmiškˌān מִשְׁכָּן dwelling-place יָ֑מָּה yˈommā יָם sea תַּעֲשֶׂ֖ה taʕᵃśˌeh עשׂה make שִׁשָּׁ֥ה šiššˌā שֵׁשׁ six קְרָשִֽׁים׃ qᵊrāšˈîm קֶרֶשׁ board
26:22. ad occidentalem vero plagam tabernaculi facies sex tabulasBut on the west side of the tabernacle thou shalt make six boards.
22. And for the hinder part of the tabernacle westward thou shalt make six boards.
And for the sides of the tabernacle westward thou shalt make six boards:

22: для задней же стороны скинии к западу сделай шесть брусьев
26:22
καὶ και and; even
ἐκ εκ from; out of
τῶν ο the
ὀπίσω οπισω in back; after
τῆς ο the
σκηνῆς σκηνη tent
κατὰ κατα down; by
τὸ ο the
μέρος μερος part; in particular
τὸ ο the
πρὸς προς to; toward
θάλασσαν θαλασσα sea
ποιήσεις ποιεω do; make
ἓξ εξ six
στύλους στυλος pillar
26:22
וּֽ ˈû וְ and
לְ lᵊ לְ to
יַרְכְּתֵ֥י yarkᵊṯˌê יַרְכָּה backside
הַ ha הַ the
מִּשְׁכָּ֖ן mmiškˌān מִשְׁכָּן dwelling-place
יָ֑מָּה yˈommā יָם sea
תַּעֲשֶׂ֖ה taʕᵃśˌeh עשׂה make
שִׁשָּׁ֥ה šiššˌā שֵׁשׁ six
קְרָשִֽׁים׃ qᵊrāšˈîm קֶרֶשׁ board
26:22. ad occidentalem vero plagam tabernaculi facies sex tabulas
But on the west side of the tabernacle thou shalt make six boards.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jg▾ kad▾ ab▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
22-25: Из восьми брусьев задней стороны шесть имели такой же вид, как и брусья продольных стен, но остальные два угловые отличаются от других. О них текст говорит следующее: «и два бруса сделай для углов скинии на двух сторонах, чтобы они были близнецы снизу и целыми сверху, к кольцу одному». По наиболее правдоподобному объяснению, данное место имеет такой смысл. Угловые столбы должны выражать собой известную строителям художественную архитектурную параллельность (быть «близнецами», сходными, «isoi» греческого перевода), начиная с самого своего основания и далее. Но вместе с этим они не должны терять что-либо из того, что свойственно другим брусьям; напротив, они должны иметь такое же полное значение в счете брусьев и, подобно всем остальным брусьям, подчиняться общей системе укрепления скинии, внося свои отдельные кольца в общие ряды колец и засовов.
Albert Barnes: Notes on the Bible - 1834
26:22
The sides of the tabernacle westward - Rather, the back of the tabernacle toward the west. See Exo 26:18.
Carl Friedrich Keil and Franz Delitzsch
26:22
Six boards were to be made for the back of the dwelling westwards (ימּה), and two boards "for the corners or angels of the dwelling at the two outermost (hinder) sides." למקצּעת (for cornered), from מקצּע, equivalent to מקצוע an angle (Ex 26:24; Ezek 46:21-22), from קצע to cut off, lit., a section, something cut off, hence an angle, or corner-piece. These corner boards (Ex 26:24) were to be "doubled (תּאמם) from below, and whole (תּמּים, integri, forming a whole) at its head (or towards its head, cf. אל Ex 36:29) with regard to the one ring, so shall it be to both of them (so shall they both be made); to the two corners shall they be" (i.e., designed for the two hinder corners). The meaning of these words, which are very obscure in some points, can only be the following: the two corner beams at the tack were to consist of two pieces joined together at a right angle, so as to form as double boards one single whole from the bottom to the top. The expressions "from below" and "up to its head" are divided between the two predicates "doubled" (תּאמים) and "whole" (תּמּים), but they belong to both of them. Each of the corner beams was to be double from the bottom to the top, and still to form one whole. There is more difficulty in the words האחת אל־הטּבּעת in Ex 26:24. It is impossible to attach any intelligible meaning to the rendering "to the first ring," so that even Knobel, who proposed it, has left it unexplained. There is hardly any other way of explaining it, than to take the word אל in the sense of "having regard to a thing," and to understand the words as meaning, that the corner beams were to form one whole, from the face that each received only one ring, probably at the corner, and not two, viz., one on each side. This one ring was placed half-way up the upright beam in the corner or angle, in such a manner that the central bolt, which stretched along the entire length of the walls (Ex 26:28), might fasten into it from both the side and back.
John Gill
26:22 And for the sides of the tabernacle,.... Or the ends of it, the east and west, and the account begins with the west:
westward thou shalt make six boards; so that the breadth of the tabernacle was but nine cubits, or four yards and a half, according to a common cubit; but two boards more placed at the two corners of the sides, next observed, added to the breadth of it.
26:2326:23: Եւ երկո՛ւ սիւնս արասցես յանկիւնս խորանին ՚ի թիկա՛նց կողմանէ[731]։ [731] Բազումք յայսմ վայրի կրկնեն զվերոյասացեալսն ըստ այսմ օրինակի. ՚Ի թիկանց կողմանց։ Զգո՛յշ լեր. եւ յետուստ խորանին ՚ի ծովակողմն կուսէ արասցես վեց սիւն. երկու սիւնս արասցես յանկիւնս խորանին ՚ի թիկանց կողմանէ. եւ եղիցին հա՛՛։
23 Երկու մոյթ կը դնես խորանի անկիւններին՝ յետեւի կողմից:
23 Խորանին անկիւններուն համար ետեւի կողմը երկու տախտակ շինէ՛։
Եւ երկուս [376]սիւնս արասցես յանկիւնս խորանին ի թիկանց կողմանէ:

26:23: Եւ երկո՛ւ սիւնս արասցես յանկիւնս խորանին ՚ի թիկա՛նց կողմանէ[731]։
[731] Բազումք յայսմ վայրի կրկնեն զվերոյասացեալսն ըստ այսմ օրինակի. ՚Ի թիկանց կողմանց։ Զգո՛յշ լեր. եւ յետուստ խորանին ՚ի ծովակողմն կուսէ արասցես վեց սիւն. երկու սիւնս արասցես յանկիւնս խորանին ՚ի թիկանց կողմանէ. եւ եղիցին հա՛՛։
23 Երկու մոյթ կը դնես խորանի անկիւններին՝ յետեւի կողմից:
23 Խորանին անկիւններուն համար ետեւի կողմը երկու տախտակ շինէ՛։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
26:2323: и два бруса сделай для углов скинии на заднюю сторону;
26:23 καὶ και and; even δύο δυο two στύλους στυλος pillar ποιήσεις ποιεω do; make ἐπὶ επι in; on τῶν ο the γωνιῶν γωνια corner τῆς ο the σκηνῆς σκηνη tent ἐκ εκ from; out of τῶν ο the ὀπισθίων οπισθιος hinder; belonging to the hinder part
26:23 וּ û וְ and שְׁנֵ֤י šᵊnˈê שְׁנַיִם two קְרָשִׁים֙ qᵊrāšîm קֶרֶשׁ board תַּעֲשֶׂ֔ה taʕᵃśˈeh עשׂה make לִ li לְ to מְקֻצְעֹ֖ת mᵊquṣʕˌōṯ קצע cut off הַ ha הַ the מִּשְׁכָּ֑ן mmiškˈān מִשְׁכָּן dwelling-place בַּ ba בְּ in † הַ the יַּרְכָתָֽיִם׃ yyarᵊḵāṯˈāyim יַרְכָּה backside
26:23. et rursum alias duas quae in angulis erigantur post tergum tabernaculiAnd again other two which shall be erected in the corners at the back of the tabernacle.
23. And two boards shalt thou make for the corners of the tabernacle in the hinder part.
And two boards shalt thou make for the corners of the tabernacle in the two sides:

23: и два бруса сделай для углов скинии на заднюю сторону;
26:23
καὶ και and; even
δύο δυο two
στύλους στυλος pillar
ποιήσεις ποιεω do; make
ἐπὶ επι in; on
τῶν ο the
γωνιῶν γωνια corner
τῆς ο the
σκηνῆς σκηνη tent
ἐκ εκ from; out of
τῶν ο the
ὀπισθίων οπισθιος hinder; belonging to the hinder part
26:23
וּ û וְ and
שְׁנֵ֤י šᵊnˈê שְׁנַיִם two
קְרָשִׁים֙ qᵊrāšîm קֶרֶשׁ board
תַּעֲשֶׂ֔ה taʕᵃśˈeh עשׂה make
לִ li לְ to
מְקֻצְעֹ֖ת mᵊquṣʕˌōṯ קצע cut off
הַ ha הַ the
מִּשְׁכָּ֑ן mmiškˈān מִשְׁכָּן dwelling-place
בַּ ba בְּ in
הַ the
יַּרְכָתָֽיִם׃ yyarᵊḵāṯˈāyim יַרְכָּה backside
26:23. et rursum alias duas quae in angulis erigantur post tergum tabernaculi
And again other two which shall be erected in the corners at the back of the tabernacle.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jg▾ tr▾ ab▾ all ▾
Albert Barnes: Notes on the Bible - 1834
26:23
In the two sides - Rather, at the back.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
26:23: corners: [Strong's H4742], Exo 36:28
John Gill
26:23 And two boards shalt thou make for the corners of the tabernacle in the two sides. For the northwest and southwest corners, in the north and south sides; concerning which Dr. Lightfoot thus writes (t): and the west end had six planks entire, besides a plank at either corner, joining end and sides together; these corner planks were of the same breadth that all the others were, and, thus set, the middle of the breadth of the one plank was laid close to the end of the south side, or to that plank that was furthest west; so that a quarter of a yard of the breadth of the corner plank was inward, to make up the tabernacle breadth, a quarter was taken up with the thickness of the side plank to which it joined, and a quarter lay outward: thus at the southwest, just so was it at the northwest corner: then count; the two corner planks were inward a quarter of a yard apiece, and the six planks that stood between them of three quarters apiece, behold five yards, just the breadth of the house between wall and wall: these corners knit end and side together, and were the strength of the building; as, adds he,"Christ is of his church, making Jews and Gentiles one spiritual temple.''
(t) Ut supra. (Works, vol 1. p. 719.)
26:2426:24: Եւ եղիցին հասարակ ՚ի ներքուստ։ Եւ ըստ նմի՛ն օրինակի լինիցին զոյգք խոյակաց նորա ՚ի մի խառնուած։ նո՛յնպէս արասցես երկոցունց անկեանցն կանգնաւորս[732]։ [732] Ոմանք. Զոյգ ՚ի խոյակացն։
24 Ներքեւի կողմից դրանք պէտք է իրար հաւասար[67] լինեն: Նոյն ձեւով հաւասար թող լինեն դրա իրար ագուցուած զոյգ խոյակները: Նոյն ձեւով կը շինես երկու անկիւնների մոյթերը: [67] 67. Այլ բնագրերում՝ ագուցուած, միացուած:
24 Վարէն թող կցուին ու վերէն մէկ օղակով կցուած մէկ կտոր թող ըլլան։ Երկուքն ալ նոյնպէս պէտք է ըլլան։ Անոնք երկու անկիւններուն համար պիտի ըլլան։
Եւ եղիցին [377]հասարակ ի ներքուստ, եւ ըստ նմին օրինակի լինիցին [378]զոյգք խոյակաց նորա ի մի խառնուած. նոյնպէս արասցես երկոցունց անկեանցն կանգնաւորս:

26:24: Եւ եղիցին հասարակ ՚ի ներքուստ։ Եւ ըստ նմի՛ն օրինակի լինիցին զոյգք խոյակաց նորա ՚ի մի խառնուած։ նո՛յնպէս արասցես երկոցունց անկեանցն կանգնաւորս[732]։
[732] Ոմանք. Զոյգ ՚ի խոյակացն։
24 Ներքեւի կողմից դրանք պէտք է իրար հաւասար[67] լինեն: Նոյն ձեւով հաւասար թող լինեն դրա իրար ագուցուած զոյգ խոյակները: Նոյն ձեւով կը շինես երկու անկիւնների մոյթերը:
[67] 67. Այլ բնագրերում՝ ագուցուած, միացուած:
24 Վարէն թող կցուին ու վերէն մէկ օղակով կցուած մէկ կտոր թող ըլլան։ Երկուքն ալ նոյնպէս պէտք է ըլլան։ Անոնք երկու անկիւններուն համար պիտի ըլլան։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
26:2424: они должны быть соединены внизу и соединены вверху к одному кольцу: так должно быть с ними обоими; для обоих углов пусть они будут;
26:24 καὶ και and; even ἔσται ειμι be ἐξ εκ from; out of ἴσου ισος equal κάτωθεν κατωθεν down; by τὸ ο the αὐτὸ αυτος he; him ἔσονται ειμι be ἴσοι ισος equal ἐκ εκ from; out of τῶν ο the κεφαλίδων κεφαλις heading εἰς εις into; for σύμβλησιν συμβλησις one; unit οὕτως ουτως so; this way ποιήσεις ποιεω do; make ἀμφοτέραις αμφοτερος both ταῖς ο the δυσὶν δυο two γωνίαις γωνια corner ἔστωσαν ειμι be
26:24 וְ wᵊ וְ and יִֽהְי֣וּ yˈihyˈû היה be תֹֽאֲמִים֮ ṯˈōʔᵃmîm תֹּואֲמִם twins מִ mi מִן from לְּ llᵊ לְ to מַטָּה֒ maṭṭˌā מַטָּה low place וְ wᵊ וְ and יַחְדָּ֗ו yaḥdˈāw יַחְדָּו together יִהְי֤וּ yihyˈû היה be תַמִּים֙ ṯammîm תָּם complete עַל־ ʕal- עַל upon רֹאשֹׁ֔ו rōšˈô רֹאשׁ head אֶל־ ʔel- אֶל to הַ ha הַ the טַּבַּ֖עַת ṭṭabbˌaʕaṯ טַבַּעַת sealing ring הָ hā הַ the אֶחָ֑ת ʔeḥˈāṯ אֶחָד one כֵּ֚ן ˈkēn כֵּן thus יִהְיֶ֣ה yihyˈeh היה be לִ li לְ to שְׁנֵיהֶ֔ם šᵊnêhˈem שְׁנַיִם two לִ li לְ to שְׁנֵ֥י šᵊnˌê שְׁנַיִם two הַ ha הַ the מִּקְצֹעֹ֖ת mmiqṣōʕˌōṯ מִקְצֹועַ corner post יִהְיֽוּ׃ yihyˈû היה be
26:24. eruntque coniunctae a deorsum usque sursum et una omnes conpago retinebit duabus quoque tabulis quae in angulis ponendae sunt similis iunctura servabiturAnd they shall be joined together from beneath unto the top, and one joint shall hold them all. The like joining shall be observed for the two boards also that are to be put in the corners.
24. And they shall be double beneath, and in like manner they shall be entire unto the top thereof unto one ring: thus shall it be for them both; they shall be for the two corners.
And they shall be coupled together beneath, and they shall be coupled together above the head of it unto one ring: thus shall it be for them both; they shall be for the two corners:

24: они должны быть соединены внизу и соединены вверху к одному кольцу: так должно быть с ними обоими; для обоих углов пусть они будут;
26:24
καὶ και and; even
ἔσται ειμι be
ἐξ εκ from; out of
ἴσου ισος equal
κάτωθεν κατωθεν down; by
τὸ ο the
αὐτὸ αυτος he; him
ἔσονται ειμι be
ἴσοι ισος equal
ἐκ εκ from; out of
τῶν ο the
κεφαλίδων κεφαλις heading
εἰς εις into; for
σύμβλησιν συμβλησις one; unit
οὕτως ουτως so; this way
ποιήσεις ποιεω do; make
ἀμφοτέραις αμφοτερος both
ταῖς ο the
δυσὶν δυο two
γωνίαις γωνια corner
ἔστωσαν ειμι be
26:24
וְ wᵊ וְ and
יִֽהְי֣וּ yˈihyˈû היה be
תֹֽאֲמִים֮ ṯˈōʔᵃmîm תֹּואֲמִם twins
מִ mi מִן from
לְּ llᵊ לְ to
מַטָּה֒ maṭṭˌā מַטָּה low place
וְ wᵊ וְ and
יַחְדָּ֗ו yaḥdˈāw יַחְדָּו together
יִהְי֤וּ yihyˈû היה be
תַמִּים֙ ṯammîm תָּם complete
עַל־ ʕal- עַל upon
רֹאשֹׁ֔ו rōšˈô רֹאשׁ head
אֶל־ ʔel- אֶל to
הַ ha הַ the
טַּבַּ֖עַת ṭṭabbˌaʕaṯ טַבַּעַת sealing ring
הָ הַ the
אֶחָ֑ת ʔeḥˈāṯ אֶחָד one
כֵּ֚ן ˈkēn כֵּן thus
יִהְיֶ֣ה yihyˈeh היה be
לִ li לְ to
שְׁנֵיהֶ֔ם šᵊnêhˈem שְׁנַיִם two
לִ li לְ to
שְׁנֵ֥י šᵊnˌê שְׁנַיִם two
הַ ha הַ the
מִּקְצֹעֹ֖ת mmiqṣōʕˌōṯ מִקְצֹועַ corner post
יִהְיֽוּ׃ yihyˈû היה be
26:24. eruntque coniunctae a deorsum usque sursum et una omnes conpago retinebit duabus quoque tabulis quae in angulis ponendae sunt similis iunctura servabitur
And they shall be joined together from beneath unto the top, and one joint shall hold them all. The like joining shall be observed for the two boards also that are to be put in the corners.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jg▾ gnv▾ tr▾ ab▾ all ▾
Albert Barnes: Notes on the Bible - 1834
26:24
The corner boards appear to have been of such width, and so placed, as to add 18 in. to the width of the structure, making up with the six boards of full width Exo 26:22 about 15 ft. in the clear (see Exo 26:18). The "ring" was so formed as to receive two bars meeting "beneath" and "above" at a right angle.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
26:24: be coupled: Heb. twined
and they shall be coupled together above: Exo 36:29, Exo 36:30; Psa 133:1-3; Co1 1:10, Co1 3:16; Pe1 2:5
Geneva 1599
26:24 And they shall be coupled together beneath, and they shall be (i) coupled together above the head of it unto one ring: thus shall it be for them both; they shall be for the two corners.
(i) The Hebrew word signifies twins declaring that they should be as perfect and well joined as possible.
John Gill
26:24 And they shall be coupled together beneath,.... At the bottom of the boards or planks:
and they shall be coupled together above the head of it unto one ring at the top of the boards there was a ring, to which they were coupled and fastened, and so at the bottom of them, though not expressed: some understand this of all the planks, both at the two sides and at the west end; but it seems rather to respect only the corner planks, since it follows:
thus shall it be for them both, they shall be for the two corners; which were coupled and joined alike at each corner as if they were twins, as the word used signifies; or the meaning is, that these were double boards, and so like twins, which were so closely put together that they seemed but one board; which was done that the corners might be thicker and stronger, and so for the greater firmness of the building.
26:2526:25: Եւ եղիցին ո՛ւթ սիւն. եւ խարիսխք նոցա արծաթիք՝ վեշտասան խարիսխք։ երկու խարիսխք առ մի սիւն յերկոցունց կողմանց նորա. եւ երկու սարիսխք առ մե՛ւս եւս սիւն[733]։ [733] Յօրինակին պակասէր. Առ մի սիւն յերկ՛՛։ ՚Ի լուս՛՛. Եւ երկու խարիսխք. համաձայն այլոց ՚ի բնաբ՛՛։
25 Այսպիսով կը ստացուի ութ մոյթ: Դրանց խարիսխները արծաթից թող լինեն. տասնվեց խարիսխ: Երկու խարիսխ՝ մի մոյթի համար նրա երկու կողմերից, եւ երկու խարիսխ էլ՝ միւս մոյթի համար:
25 Այսպէս՝ ասոնք ութը տախտակ պիտի ըլլան ու անոնց արծաթ խարիսխները տասնըվեց խարիսխ պիտի ըլլան։ Մէկ տախտակին տակ երկու խարիսխ թող ըլլայ։
Եւ եղիցին ութ [379]սիւն. եւ խարիսխք նոցա արծաթիք` վեշտասան խարիսխք. երկու խարիսխք [380]առ մի սիւն յերկոցունց կողմանց նորա, եւ երկու խարիսխք առ մեւս եւս սիւն:

26:25: Եւ եղիցին ո՛ւթ սիւն. եւ խարիսխք նոցա արծաթիք՝ վեշտասան խարիսխք։ երկու խարիսխք առ մի սիւն յերկոցունց կողմանց նորա. եւ երկու սարիսխք առ մե՛ւս եւս սիւն[733]։
[733] Յօրինակին պակասէր. Առ մի սիւն յերկ՛՛։ ՚Ի լուս՛՛. Եւ երկու խարիսխք. համաձայն այլոց ՚ի բնաբ՛՛։
25 Այսպիսով կը ստացուի ութ մոյթ: Դրանց խարիսխները արծաթից թող լինեն. տասնվեց խարիսխ: Երկու խարիսխ՝ մի մոյթի համար նրա երկու կողմերից, եւ երկու խարիսխ էլ՝ միւս մոյթի համար:
25 Այսպէս՝ ասոնք ութը տախտակ պիտի ըլլան ու անոնց արծաթ խարիսխները տասնըվեց խարիսխ պիտի ըլլան։ Մէկ տախտակին տակ երկու խարիսխ թող ըլլայ։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
26:2525: и так будет восемь брусьев, и для них серебряных подножий шестнадцать: два подножия под один брус, и два подножия под другой брус.
26:25 καὶ και and; even ἔσονται ειμι be ὀκτὼ οκτω eight στῦλοι στυλος pillar καὶ και and; even αἱ ο the βάσεις βασις sole of the foot αὐτῶν αυτος he; him ἀργυραῖ αργυρεος of silver δέκα δεκα ten ἕξ εξ six δύο δυο two βάσεις βασις sole of the foot τῷ ο the στύλῳ στυλος pillar τῷ ο the ἑνὶ εις.1 one; unit εἰς εις into; for ἀμφότερα αμφοτερος both τὰ ο the μέρη μερος part; in particular αὐτοῦ αυτος he; him καὶ και and; even δύο δυο two βάσεις βασις sole of the foot τῷ ο the στύλῳ στυλος pillar τῷ ο the ἑνί εις.1 one; unit
26:25 וְ wᵊ וְ and הָיוּ֙ hāyˌû היה be שְׁמֹנָ֣ה šᵊmōnˈā שְׁמֹנֶה eight קְרָשִׁ֔ים qᵊrāšˈîm קֶרֶשׁ board וְ wᵊ וְ and אַדְנֵיהֶ֣ם ʔaḏnêhˈem אֶדֶן pedestal כֶּ֔סֶף kˈesef כֶּסֶף silver שִׁשָּׁ֥ה šiššˌā שֵׁשׁ six עָשָׂ֖ר ʕāśˌār עָשָׂר -teen אֲדָנִ֑ים ʔᵃḏānˈîm אֶדֶן pedestal שְׁנֵ֣י šᵊnˈê שְׁנַיִם two אֲדָנִ֗ים ʔᵃḏānˈîm אֶדֶן pedestal תַּ֚חַת ˈtaḥaṯ תַּחַת under part הַ ha הַ the קֶּ֣רֶשׁ qqˈereš קֶרֶשׁ board הָ hā הַ the אֶחָ֔ד ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one וּ û וְ and שְׁנֵ֣י šᵊnˈê שְׁנַיִם two אֲדָנִ֔ים ʔᵃḏānˈîm אֶדֶן pedestal תַּ֖חַת tˌaḥaṯ תַּחַת under part הַ ha הַ the קֶּ֥רֶשׁ qqˌereš קֶרֶשׁ board הָ hā הַ the אֶחָֽד׃ ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one
26:25. et erunt simul tabulae octo bases earum argenteae sedecim duabus basibus per unam tabulam supputatisAnd they shall be in all eight boards, and their silver sockets sixteen, reckoning two sockets for each board.
25. And there shall be eight boards, and their sockets of silver, sixteen sockets; two sockets under one board, and two sockets under another board.
And they shall be eight boards, and their sockets [of] silver, sixteen sockets; two sockets under one board, and two sockets under another board:

25: и так будет восемь брусьев, и для них серебряных подножий шестнадцать: два подножия под один брус, и два подножия под другой брус.
26:25
καὶ και and; even
ἔσονται ειμι be
ὀκτὼ οκτω eight
στῦλοι στυλος pillar
καὶ και and; even
αἱ ο the
βάσεις βασις sole of the foot
αὐτῶν αυτος he; him
ἀργυραῖ αργυρεος of silver
δέκα δεκα ten
ἕξ εξ six
δύο δυο two
βάσεις βασις sole of the foot
τῷ ο the
στύλῳ στυλος pillar
τῷ ο the
ἑνὶ εις.1 one; unit
εἰς εις into; for
ἀμφότερα αμφοτερος both
τὰ ο the
μέρη μερος part; in particular
αὐτοῦ αυτος he; him
καὶ και and; even
δύο δυο two
βάσεις βασις sole of the foot
τῷ ο the
στύλῳ στυλος pillar
τῷ ο the
ἑνί εις.1 one; unit
26:25
וְ wᵊ וְ and
הָיוּ֙ hāyˌû היה be
שְׁמֹנָ֣ה šᵊmōnˈā שְׁמֹנֶה eight
קְרָשִׁ֔ים qᵊrāšˈîm קֶרֶשׁ board
וְ wᵊ וְ and
אַדְנֵיהֶ֣ם ʔaḏnêhˈem אֶדֶן pedestal
כֶּ֔סֶף kˈesef כֶּסֶף silver
שִׁשָּׁ֥ה šiššˌā שֵׁשׁ six
עָשָׂ֖ר ʕāśˌār עָשָׂר -teen
אֲדָנִ֑ים ʔᵃḏānˈîm אֶדֶן pedestal
שְׁנֵ֣י šᵊnˈê שְׁנַיִם two
אֲדָנִ֗ים ʔᵃḏānˈîm אֶדֶן pedestal
תַּ֚חַת ˈtaḥaṯ תַּחַת under part
הַ ha הַ the
קֶּ֣רֶשׁ qqˈereš קֶרֶשׁ board
הָ הַ the
אֶחָ֔ד ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one
וּ û וְ and
שְׁנֵ֣י šᵊnˈê שְׁנַיִם two
אֲדָנִ֔ים ʔᵃḏānˈîm אֶדֶן pedestal
תַּ֖חַת tˌaḥaṯ תַּחַת under part
הַ ha הַ the
קֶּ֥רֶשׁ qqˌereš קֶרֶשׁ board
הָ הַ the
אֶחָֽד׃ ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one
26:25. et erunt simul tabulae octo bases earum argenteae sedecim duabus basibus per unam tabulam supputatis
And they shall be in all eight boards, and their silver sockets sixteen, reckoning two sockets for each board.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jg▾ kad▾ all ▾
Carl Friedrich Keil and Franz Delitzsch
26:25
Sixteen sockets were to be made for these eight boards, two for each. - Ex 26:26-29. To fasten the boards, that they might not separate from one another, bars of acacia-wood were to be made and covered with gold, five for each of the three sides of the dwelling; and though it is not expressly stated, yet the reference to rings in Ex 26:29 as holders of the bars (לבּריחים בּתּים) is a sufficient indication that they were passed through golden rings fastened into the boards.
John Gill
26:25 And they shall be eight boards,.... Six at the west end and one at each corner, northwest and southwest:
and their sockets of silver, sixteen sockets the same as those for the boards on both sides north and south: they were of the same metal, silver; and they were two under one board, to receive its two tenons as follows:
two sockets under one board, and two sockets under another board; and so under all eight, and which sockets joining with those of the two sides, and in all made ninety six, were the basis and foundation of the tabernacle, and was a figure of Christ, the only foundation of his church and people; and the several tenons of the boards joined into those sockets of silver may denote the union of the members of Christ and ministers of his word to him, and their dependence on him.
26:2626:26: Եւ արասցես նիգս յանփուտ փայտից. հի՛նգ նիգ առ մի սիւն ՚ի միոջէ՛ կողմանէ խորանին,
26 Կարծր փայտից նիգեր կը պատրաստես. հինգ նիգ՝ վրանի մի կողմի մոյթի համար,
26 Սատիմի փայտէ նիգեր շինէ՛։ Խորանին մէկ քովի տախտակներուն համար՝ հինգ նիգ,
Եւ արասցես նիգս յանփուտ փայտից. հինգ նիգ առ [381]մի սիւն`` ի միոջէ կողմանէ խորանին:

26:26: Եւ արասցես նիգս յանփուտ փայտից. հի՛նգ նիգ առ մի սիւն ՚ի միոջէ՛ կողմանէ խորանին,
26 Կարծր փայտից նիգեր կը պատրաստես. հինգ նիգ՝ վրանի մի կողմի մոյթի համար,
26 Սատիմի փայտէ նիգեր շինէ՛։ Խորանին մէկ քովի տախտակներուն համար՝ հինգ նիգ,
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
26:2626: И сделай шесты из дерева ситтим, пять для брусьев одной стороны скинии,
26:26 καὶ και and; even ποιήσεις ποιεω do; make μοχλοὺς μοχλος from; out of ξύλων ξυλον wood; timber ἀσήπτων ασηπτος five τῷ ο the ἑνὶ εις.1 one; unit στύλῳ στυλος pillar ἐκ εκ from; out of τοῦ ο the ἑνὸς εις.1 one; unit μέρους μερος part; in particular τῆς ο the σκηνῆς σκηνη tent
26:26 וְ wᵊ וְ and עָשִׂ֥יתָ ʕāśˌîṯā עשׂה make בְרִיחִ֖ם vᵊrîḥˌim בְּרִיחַ bar עֲצֵ֣י ʕᵃṣˈê עֵץ tree שִׁטִּ֑ים šiṭṭˈîm שִׁטָּה acacia חֲמִשָּׁ֕ה ḥᵃmiššˈā חָמֵשׁ five לְ lᵊ לְ to קַרְשֵׁ֥י qaršˌê קֶרֶשׁ board צֶֽלַע־ ṣˈelaʕ- צֵלָע side הַ ha הַ the מִּשְׁכָּ֖ן mmiškˌān מִשְׁכָּן dwelling-place הָ hā הַ the אֶחָֽד׃ ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one
26:26. facies et vectes de lignis setthim quinque ad continendas tabulas in uno latere tabernaculiThou shalt make also five bars of setim wood, to hold together the boards on one side of the tabernacle.
26. And thou shalt make bars of acacia wood; five for the boards of the one side of the tabernacle,
And thou shalt make bars [of] shittim wood; five for the boards of the one side of the tabernacle:

26: И сделай шесты из дерева ситтим, пять для брусьев одной стороны скинии,
26:26
καὶ και and; even
ποιήσεις ποιεω do; make
μοχλοὺς μοχλος from; out of
ξύλων ξυλον wood; timber
ἀσήπτων ασηπτος five
τῷ ο the
ἑνὶ εις.1 one; unit
στύλῳ στυλος pillar
ἐκ εκ from; out of
τοῦ ο the
ἑνὸς εις.1 one; unit
μέρους μερος part; in particular
τῆς ο the
σκηνῆς σκηνη tent
26:26
וְ wᵊ וְ and
עָשִׂ֥יתָ ʕāśˌîṯā עשׂה make
בְרִיחִ֖ם vᵊrîḥˌim בְּרִיחַ bar
עֲצֵ֣י ʕᵃṣˈê עֵץ tree
שִׁטִּ֑ים šiṭṭˈîm שִׁטָּה acacia
חֲמִשָּׁ֕ה ḥᵃmiššˈā חָמֵשׁ five
לְ lᵊ לְ to
קַרְשֵׁ֥י qaršˌê קֶרֶשׁ board
צֶֽלַע־ ṣˈelaʕ- צֵלָע side
הַ ha הַ the
מִּשְׁכָּ֖ן mmiškˌān מִשְׁכָּן dwelling-place
הָ הַ the
אֶחָֽד׃ ʔeḥˈāḏ אֶחָד one
26:26. facies et vectes de lignis setthim quinque ad continendas tabulas in uno latere tabernaculi
Thou shalt make also five bars of setim wood, to hold together the boards on one side of the tabernacle.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jg▾ tr▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
26-29: Вставленные своими шипами в подставы, брусья получали устойчивость внизу, в своем основании. Для сообщения же им устойчивости на остальном протяжении употреблялись шесты, по пяти на каждой стороне. Так как шесты продевались в кольца, то, очевидно, были круглыми. Один из них называется «внутренним, проходящим по средине брусьев», точнее — «сквозь толщу брусьев», сквозь пробуравленные в самых брусьях отверстия. Сообразно с этим четыре других шеста должны были идти по наружной, лицевой стороне стен скинии. Замечание о пятом шесте, что он шел от одного конца до другого, указывает на его длину, равную длине всей скинии. И так как и прочие шесты должны были, подобно ему, скреплять брусья, то представлять их более короткими нет основания. Что касается расположения шестов, то текст о нем не говорит. Можно лишь думать, что «внутренний» шест шел по самой средине высоты брусьев, на равном расстоянии от низа и верха. Остальные четыре были расположены таким образом, что два находились ниже «внутреннего», на равном расстоянии от него и друг от друга, а два другие выше его.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
26:26: bars of shittim wood: Exo 36:31-38; Num 3:36, Num 4:31; Rom 15:1; Co1 9:19, Co1 9:20; Gal 6:1, Gal 6:2; Eph 4:16; Col 2:19
John Gill
26:26 And thou shalt make bars of shittim wood, Which being put into rings or staples of gold, kept the boards tight, close, and firm together:
five for the boards of the one side of the tabernacle: for instance, the south side; four of these were placed, two at the upper end of the boards, and two at the lower end, and the fifth in the middle, particularly taken notice of, Ex 26:28, how long these bars were it is not said, but it is reasonable to conclude that they reached the length of the tabernacle, which was thirty cubits; and as it was not easy to get bars of such a length, the notion of Josephus (u) perhaps, may be right, that each two consisted of divers parts which joined one another, the head of one entering into the hollow of the other and as he supposes they were five cubits long, a row of them must have six parts, which went along the sides, north and south, and the west end two, which was but ten cubits.
(u) Ut supra. (Antiqu. l. 3. c. 6. sect. 3.)
26:2726:27: եւ հինգ նիգ առ մե՛ւս եւս սիւն յերկրո՛րդ կողմանէ խորանին. եւ հինգ նիգ առ մի սիւն ՚ի թիկանց խորանին ընդ ծովակողմն[734]։ [734] Ոմանք. Եւ հինգ նիգ առ մի սի՛ւն յերկրորդ կող՛՛։
27 հինգ նիգ՝ վրանի երկրորդ կողմի միւս մոյթի համար եւ հինգ նիգ՝ վրանի թիկունքի՝ ծովահայեաց կողմի մոյթի համար:
27 Խորանին միւս քովի տախտակներուն համար՝ հինգ նիգ ու դէպի արեւմուտք խորանին ետեւի կողմի տախտակներուն համար հինգ նիգ պէտք է ըլլայ։
եւ հինգ նիգ առ [382]մեւս եւս սիւն`` յերկրորդ կողմանէ խորանին. եւ հինգ նիգ առ [383]մի սիւն`` ի թիկանց խորանին ընդ ծովակողմն:

26:27: եւ հինգ նիգ առ մե՛ւս եւս սիւն յերկրո՛րդ կողմանէ խորանին. եւ հինգ նիգ առ մի սիւն ՚ի թիկանց խորանին ընդ ծովակողմն[734]։
[734] Ոմանք. Եւ հինգ նիգ առ մի սի՛ւն յերկրորդ կող՛՛։
27 հինգ նիգ՝ վրանի երկրորդ կողմի միւս մոյթի համար եւ հինգ նիգ՝ վրանի թիկունքի՝ ծովահայեաց կողմի մոյթի համար:
27 Խորանին միւս քովի տախտակներուն համար՝ հինգ նիգ ու դէպի արեւմուտք խորանին ետեւի կողմի տախտակներուն համար հինգ նիգ պէտք է ըլլայ։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
26:2727: и пять шестов для брусьев другой стороны скинии, и пять шестов для брусьев задней стороны сзади скинии, к западу;
26:27 καὶ και and; even πέντε πεντε five μοχλοὺς μοχλος the στύλῳ στυλος pillar τῷ ο the κλίτει κλιτος the σκηνῆς σκηνη tent τῷ ο the δευτέρῳ δευτερος second καὶ και and; even πέντε πεντε five μοχλοὺς μοχλος the στύλῳ στυλος pillar τῷ ο the ὀπισθίῳ οπισθιος the κλίτει κλιτος the σκηνῆς σκηνη tent τῷ ο the πρὸς προς to; toward θάλασσαν θαλασσα sea
26:27 וַ wa וְ and חֲמִשָּׁ֣ה ḥᵃmiššˈā חָמֵשׁ five בְרִיחִ֔ם vᵊrîḥˈim בְּרִיחַ bar לְ lᵊ לְ to קַרְשֵׁ֥י qaršˌê קֶרֶשׁ board צֶֽלַע־ ṣˈelaʕ- צֵלָע side הַ ha הַ the מִּשְׁכָּ֖ן mmiškˌān מִשְׁכָּן dwelling-place הַ ha הַ the שֵּׁנִ֑ית ššēnˈîṯ שֵׁנִי second וַ wa וְ and חֲמִשָּׁ֣ה ḥᵃmiššˈā חָמֵשׁ five בְרִיחִ֗ם vᵊrîḥˈim בְּרִיחַ bar לְ lᵊ לְ to קַרְשֵׁי֙ qaršˌê קֶרֶשׁ board צֶ֣לַע ṣˈelaʕ צֵלָע side הַ ha הַ the מִּשְׁכָּ֔ן mmiškˈān מִשְׁכָּן dwelling-place לַ la לְ to † הַ the יַּרְכָתַ֖יִם yyarᵊḵāṯˌayim יַרְכָּה backside יָֽמָּה׃ yˈommā יָם sea
26:27. et quinque alios in altero et eiusdem numeri ad occidentalem plagamAnd five others on the other side, and as many at the west side:
27. and five bars for the boards of the other side of the tabernacle, and five bars for the boards of the side of the tabernacle, for the hinder part westward.
And five bars for the boards of the other side of the tabernacle, and five bars for the boards of the side of the tabernacle, for the two sides westward:

27: и пять шестов для брусьев другой стороны скинии, и пять шестов для брусьев задней стороны сзади скинии, к западу;
26:27
καὶ και and; even
πέντε πεντε five
μοχλοὺς μοχλος the
στύλῳ στυλος pillar
τῷ ο the
κλίτει κλιτος the
σκηνῆς σκηνη tent
τῷ ο the
δευτέρῳ δευτερος second
καὶ και and; even
πέντε πεντε five
μοχλοὺς μοχλος the
στύλῳ στυλος pillar
τῷ ο the
ὀπισθίῳ οπισθιος the
κλίτει κλιτος the
σκηνῆς σκηνη tent
τῷ ο the
πρὸς προς to; toward
θάλασσαν θαλασσα sea
26:27
וַ wa וְ and
חֲמִשָּׁ֣ה ḥᵃmiššˈā חָמֵשׁ five
בְרִיחִ֔ם vᵊrîḥˈim בְּרִיחַ bar
לְ lᵊ לְ to
קַרְשֵׁ֥י qaršˌê קֶרֶשׁ board
צֶֽלַע־ ṣˈelaʕ- צֵלָע side
הַ ha הַ the
מִּשְׁכָּ֖ן mmiškˌān מִשְׁכָּן dwelling-place
הַ ha הַ the
שֵּׁנִ֑ית ššēnˈîṯ שֵׁנִי second
וַ wa וְ and
חֲמִשָּׁ֣ה ḥᵃmiššˈā חָמֵשׁ five
בְרִיחִ֗ם vᵊrîḥˈim בְּרִיחַ bar
לְ lᵊ לְ to
קַרְשֵׁי֙ qaršˌê קֶרֶשׁ board
צֶ֣לַע ṣˈelaʕ צֵלָע side
הַ ha הַ the
מִּשְׁכָּ֔ן mmiškˈān מִשְׁכָּן dwelling-place
לַ la לְ to
הַ the
יַּרְכָתַ֖יִם yyarᵊḵāṯˌayim יַרְכָּה backside
יָֽמָּה׃ yˈommā יָם sea
26:27. et quinque alios in altero et eiusdem numeri ad occidentalem plagam
And five others on the other side, and as many at the west side:
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jg▾ ab▾ all ▾
Albert Barnes: Notes on the Bible - 1834
26:27
For the two sides westward - For the back toward the west. Compare Exo 26:22,
John Gill
26:27 And five bars for the boards of the other side of the tabernacle,.... Suppose the north, these bars were disposed of in the same manner as those on the south side:
and five bars for the boards of that side of the tabernacle; or the end of it, the west end, as follows:
for the two sides westward; that is, the two corners at the west end, the southwest and the northwest corners; and these five bars reached from the one to the other, two at the upper part of the boards, and two at the lower part, and one in the middle.
26:2826:28: Եւ նիգ մի ՚ի մէջ սեանցն թափանցա՛նց՝ ՚ի միոջէ կողմնէ ՚ի մի՛ւս կողմն։
28 Մի նիգ էլ մոյթերի մի ծայրից մինչեւ միւսն անցկացուելով՝ դրանք թող միացնի իրար:
28 Եւ մէջտեղի նիգը, այսինքն տախտակներուն մէջտեղ եղածը, մէկ ծայրէն միւս ծայրը թող անցնի։
Եւ նիգ մի ի մէջ [384]սեանցն` թափանցանց ի միոջէ ի մեւս կողմն:

26:28: Եւ նիգ մի ՚ի մէջ սեանցն թափանցա՛նց՝ ՚ի միոջէ կողմնէ ՚ի մի՛ւս կողմն։
28 Մի նիգ էլ մոյթերի մի ծայրից մինչեւ միւսն անցկացուելով՝ դրանք թող միացնի իրար:
28 Եւ մէջտեղի նիգը, այսինքն տախտակներուն մէջտեղ եղածը, մէկ ծայրէն միւս ծայրը թող անցնի։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
26:2828: а внутренний шест будет проходить по средине брусьев от одного конца до другого;
26:28 καὶ και and; even ὁ ο the μοχλὸς μοχλος the μέσος μεσος in the midst; in the middle ἀνὰ ανα.1 up; each μέσον μεσος in the midst; in the middle τῶν ο the στύλων στυλος pillar διικνείσθω διικνεομαι penetrate ἀπὸ απο from; away τοῦ ο the ἑνὸς εις.1 one; unit κλίτους κλιτος into; for τὸ ο the ἕτερον ετερος different; alternate κλίτος κλιτος clime
26:28 וְ wᵊ וְ and הַ ha הַ the בְּרִ֥יחַ bbᵊrˌîₐḥ בְּרִיחַ bar הַ ha הַ the תִּיכֹ֖ן ttîḵˌōn תִּיכֹון middle בְּ bᵊ בְּ in תֹ֣וךְ ṯˈôḵ תָּוֶךְ midst הַ ha הַ the קְּרָשִׁ֑ים qqᵊrāšˈîm קֶרֶשׁ board מַבְרִ֕חַ mavrˈiₐḥ ברח run away מִן־ min- מִן from הַ ha הַ the קָּצֶ֖ה qqāṣˌeh קָצֶה end אֶל־ ʔel- אֶל to הַ ha הַ the קָּצֶֽה׃ qqāṣˈeh קָצֶה end
26:28. qui mittentur per medias tabulas a summo usque ad summumAnd they shall be put along by the midst of the boards, from one end to the other.
28. And the middle bar in the midst of the boards shall pass through from end to end.
And the middle bar in the midst of the boards shall reach from end to end:

28: а внутренний шест будет проходить по средине брусьев от одного конца до другого;
26:28
καὶ και and; even
ο the
μοχλὸς μοχλος the
μέσος μεσος in the midst; in the middle
ἀνὰ ανα.1 up; each
μέσον μεσος in the midst; in the middle
τῶν ο the
στύλων στυλος pillar
διικνείσθω διικνεομαι penetrate
ἀπὸ απο from; away
τοῦ ο the
ἑνὸς εις.1 one; unit
κλίτους κλιτος into; for
τὸ ο the
ἕτερον ετερος different; alternate
κλίτος κλιτος clime
26:28
וְ wᵊ וְ and
הַ ha הַ the
בְּרִ֥יחַ bbᵊrˌîₐḥ בְּרִיחַ bar
הַ ha הַ the
תִּיכֹ֖ן ttîḵˌōn תִּיכֹון middle
בְּ bᵊ בְּ in
תֹ֣וךְ ṯˈôḵ תָּוֶךְ midst
הַ ha הַ the
קְּרָשִׁ֑ים qqᵊrāšˈîm קֶרֶשׁ board
מַבְרִ֕חַ mavrˈiₐḥ ברח run away
מִן־ min- מִן from
הַ ha הַ the
קָּצֶ֖ה qqāṣˌeh קָצֶה end
אֶל־ ʔel- אֶל to
הַ ha הַ the
קָּצֶֽה׃ qqāṣˈeh קָצֶה end
26:28. qui mittentur per medias tabulas a summo usque ad summum
And they shall be put along by the midst of the boards, from one end to the other.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jg▾ kad▾ tr▾ ab▾ all ▾
Albert Barnes: Notes on the Bible - 1834
26:28
In the midst of the boards - If we suppose the boards to have been of ordinary thickness Exo 26:16, the bar was visible and passed through an entire row of rings. In any case, it served to hold the whole wall together.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
26:28: reach: lit, flee, Ch1 12:15; Neh 13:28; Job 41:28; Pro 19:26
Carl Friedrich Keil and Franz Delitzsch
26:28
"And the middle bar in the midst of the boards (i.e., at an equal distance from both top and bottom) shall be fastening (מבריח) from one end to the other." As it thus expressly stated with reference to the middle bar, that it was to fasten, i.e., to reach along the walls from one end to the other, we necessarily conclude, with Rashi and others, that the other four bars on every side were not to reach the whole length of the walls, and may therefore suppose that they were only half as long as the middle one, so that there were only three rows of bars on each wall, the upper and lower being composed of two bars each.
John Gill
26:28 And the middle bar in the midst of the boards shall reach from end to end. From east to west, as Jarchi interprets it; but this can only be said of the middle bar on the north and south sides of the tabernacle, for the middle bar at the west end was north to south: about this bar there is some difficulty, as that it is said to be "from end to end", as if that only was; whereas it is reasonable to suppose that the rest were so likewise; it may be, they might come somewhat short of reaching the end, whereas this did entirely; or rather the truer reason is, because the rest of the bars consisted of various parts; whereas this was a long bar of one entire piece, reaching from one end of the tabernacle to the other: likewise it is said to be "in the midst of the boards"; and the Jewish writers are generally of opinion, that it did not run along in rings as the other bars did, but the boards and planks being bored, this went through the thickness of the wood throughout; and in this they are followed by Arias Moatanus, Vatablus, Dr. Lightfoot, and others: but to this it may be objected, that the boards must be very thick indeed, even incredibly so, to admit of such a bore as to let in a bar of this kind, and is not so consistent with its being a portable house; and besides, when it was at any time taken down, in order to be removed, such a bar must give a great deal of trouble, and be in danger of being broke to pieces; besides, if it was thus covered in the boards, as it must be, what need was there that it should be overlaid with gold, as in the next verse? it is more probable, therefore, that it went not through the midst of the thickness of the wood, but in the middle of the length of the planks, and so expresses its different situation from the rest of the bars, which were at or towards the top and bottom of the planks, and this in the middle of them. It is not said of these bars, whether they were within or on the outside of the tabernacle; it is most likely they were on the outside, as Josephus (w) says they were; since they would not have made a good appearance within side, where they would have been always seen by the priests within, whereas being without they were covered with the curtains.
(w) Ut supra. (Antiqu. l. 3. c. 6. sect. 3.)
26:2926:29: Եւ զսիւնսն պատեսցես ոսկւո՛վ. եւ արասցես օ՛ղս ոսկիս՝ յորս ագուցանիցես զնիգսն։ եւ պատեսցես զնիգսն ոսկւո՛վ[735]։ [735] Ոմանք. Ագուցանիցեն զնիգսն, եւ պատեսցեն։
29 Մոյթերը կը պատես ոսկով: Կը պատրաստես ոսկէ օղակներ, որոնց մէջ կը հագցնես նիգերը: Նիգերը կը պատես ոսկով:
29 Եւ տախտակները ոսկիով պատէ՛ ու անոնց օղակները, այսինքն նիգերուն տեղերը, ոսկիէ շինէ՛։ Նիգերը ոսկիով պատէ՛։
Եւ [385]զսիւնսն պատեսցես ոսկւով. եւ արասցես օղս ոսկիս` յորս ագուցանիցես զնիգսն. եւ պատեսցես զնիգսն ոսկւով:

26:29: Եւ զսիւնսն պատեսցես ոսկւո՛վ. եւ արասցես օ՛ղս ոսկիս՝ յորս ագուցանիցես զնիգսն։ եւ պատեսցես զնիգսն ոսկւո՛վ[735]։
[735] Ոմանք. Ագուցանիցեն զնիգսն, եւ պատեսցեն։
29 Մոյթերը կը պատես ոսկով: Կը պատրաստես ոսկէ օղակներ, որոնց մէջ կը հագցնես նիգերը: Նիգերը կը պատես ոսկով:
29 Եւ տախտակները ոսկիով պատէ՛ ու անոնց օղակները, այսինքն նիգերուն տեղերը, ոսկիէ շինէ՛։ Նիգերը ոսկիով պատէ՛։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
26:2929: брусья же обложи золотом, и кольца, для вкладывания шестов, сделай из золота, и шесты обложи золотом.
26:29 καὶ και and; even τοὺς ο the στύλους στυλος pillar καταχρυσώσεις καταχρυσοω gold piece; gold leaf καὶ και and; even τοὺς ο the δακτυλίους δακτυλιος ring ποιήσεις ποιεω do; make χρυσοῦς χρυσεος of gold; golden εἰς εις into; for οὓς ος who; what εἰσάξεις εισαγω lead in; bring in τοὺς ο the μοχλούς μοχλος and; even καταχρυσώσεις καταχρυσοω the μοχλοὺς μοχλος gold piece; gold leaf
26:29 וְֽ wᵊˈ וְ and אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] הַ ha הַ the קְּרָשִׁ֞ים qqᵊrāšˈîm קֶרֶשׁ board תְּצַפֶּ֣ה tᵊṣappˈeh צפה arrange זָהָ֗ב zāhˈāv זָהָב gold וְ wᵊ וְ and אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] טַבְּעֹֽתֵיהֶם֙ ṭabbᵊʕˈōṯêhem טַבַּעַת sealing ring תַּעֲשֶׂ֣ה taʕᵃśˈeh עשׂה make זָהָ֔ב zāhˈāv זָהָב gold בָּתִּ֖ים bāttˌîm בַּיִת house לַ la לְ to † הַ the בְּרִיחִ֑ם bbᵊrîḥˈim בְּרִיחַ bar וְ wᵊ וְ and צִפִּיתָ֥ ṣippîṯˌā צפה arrange אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] הַ ha הַ the בְּרִיחִ֖ם bbᵊrîḥˌim בְּרִיחַ bar זָהָֽב׃ zāhˈāv זָהָב gold
26:29. ipsasque tabulas deaurabis et fundes eis anulos aureos per quos vectes tabulata contineant quos operies lamminis aureisThe boards also themselves thou shalt overlay with gold, and shalt cast rings of gold to be set upon them, for places for the bars to hold together the boardwork: which bars thou shalt cover with plates of gold.
29. And thou shalt overlay the boards with gold, and make their rings of gold for places for the bars: and thou shalt overlay the bars with gold.
And thou shalt overlay the boards with gold, and make their rings [of] gold [for] places for the bars: and thou shalt overlay the bars with gold:

29: брусья же обложи золотом, и кольца, для вкладывания шестов, сделай из золота, и шесты обложи золотом.
26:29
καὶ και and; even
τοὺς ο the
στύλους στυλος pillar
καταχρυσώσεις καταχρυσοω gold piece; gold leaf
καὶ και and; even
τοὺς ο the
δακτυλίους δακτυλιος ring
ποιήσεις ποιεω do; make
χρυσοῦς χρυσεος of gold; golden
εἰς εις into; for
οὓς ος who; what
εἰσάξεις εισαγω lead in; bring in
τοὺς ο the
μοχλούς μοχλος and; even
καταχρυσώσεις καταχρυσοω the
μοχλοὺς μοχλος gold piece; gold leaf
26:29
וְֽ wᵊˈ וְ and
אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker]
הַ ha הַ the
קְּרָשִׁ֞ים qqᵊrāšˈîm קֶרֶשׁ board
תְּצַפֶּ֣ה tᵊṣappˈeh צפה arrange
זָהָ֗ב zāhˈāv זָהָב gold
וְ wᵊ וְ and
אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker]
טַבְּעֹֽתֵיהֶם֙ ṭabbᵊʕˈōṯêhem טַבַּעַת sealing ring
תַּעֲשֶׂ֣ה taʕᵃśˈeh עשׂה make
זָהָ֔ב zāhˈāv זָהָב gold
בָּתִּ֖ים bāttˌîm בַּיִת house
לַ la לְ to
הַ the
בְּרִיחִ֑ם bbᵊrîḥˈim בְּרִיחַ bar
וְ wᵊ וְ and
צִפִּיתָ֥ ṣippîṯˌā צפה arrange
אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker]
הַ ha הַ the
בְּרִיחִ֖ם bbᵊrîḥˌim בְּרִיחַ bar
זָהָֽב׃ zāhˈāv זָהָב gold
26:29. ipsasque tabulas deaurabis et fundes eis anulos aureos per quos vectes tabulata contineant quos operies lamminis aureis
The boards also themselves thou shalt overlay with gold, and shalt cast rings of gold to be set upon them, for places for the bars to hold together the boardwork: which bars thou shalt cover with plates of gold.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jg▾ tr▾ ac▾ all ▾
Adam Clarke: Commentary on the Bible - 1831
26:29: Thou shalt overlay the boards with gold - It is not said how thick the gold was by which these boards, etc., were overlaid; it was no doubt done with gold plates, but these must have been very thin, else the boards, etc., must have been insupportably heavy. The gold was probably something like our gold leaf, but not brought to so great a degree of tenuity.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
26:29: overlay the boards with gold: Exo 25:11, Exo 25:12
John Gill
26:29 And thou shalt overlay the boards with gold,.... Not merely gild them, but cover them with thin plates of gold; and which, because it would take up a great quantity of gold, and make the boards very heavy, unless the plates were very thin, when they were taken down and carried from place to place, some have thought they were only glided:
and make their rings of gold, for places for the bars; these were made of solid gold, and were as staples to let the bars into: and, according to Jarchi, there were two rings to every board:
and thou shalt overlay the bars with gold: cover them with plates of gold; and these bars and staples of gold show how compact and firm the church of God is, through his almighty power, as well as how glorious and splendid it is by his grace.
26:3026:30: Եւ կանգնեսցե՛ս զխորանն վկայութեան՝ ըստ օրինակին որ ցուցաւ քեզ ՚ի լերինն[736]։[736] Ոմանք. Զխորանն ըստ օրինակին. ՚ի լերին անդ, կամ անդր։
30 Վրանը կը կանգնեցնես այն ձեւով, որ ցոյց տրուեց քեզ լերան վրայ:
30 Խորանը կանգնեցուր այն ձեւին համաձայն, որ լերանը վրայ քեզի ցուցուեցաւ։
Եւ կանգնեսցես զխորանն ըստ օրինակին որ ցուցաւ քեզ ի լերին անդ:

26:30: Եւ կանգնեսցե՛ս զխորանն վկայութեան՝ ըստ օրինակին որ ցուցաւ քեզ ՚ի լերինն[736]։
[736] Ոմանք. Զխորանն ըստ օրինակին. ՚ի լերին անդ, կամ անդր։
30 Վրանը կը կանգնեցնես այն ձեւով, որ ցոյց տրուեց քեզ լերան վրայ:
30 Խորանը կանգնեցուր այն ձեւին համաձայն, որ լերանը վրայ քեզի ցուցուեցաւ։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
26:3030: И поставь скинию по образцу, который показан тебе на горе.
26:30 καὶ και and; even ἀναστήσεις ανιστημι stand up; resurrect τὴν ο the σκηνὴν σκηνη tent κατὰ κατα down; by τὸ ο the εἶδος ειδος aspect; shape τὸ ο the δεδειγμένον δεικνυω show σοι σοι you ἐν εν in τῷ ο the ὄρει ορος mountain; mount
26:30 וַ wa וְ and הֲקֵמֹתָ֖ hᵃqēmōṯˌā קום arise אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] הַ ha הַ the מִּשְׁכָּ֑ן mmiškˈān מִשְׁכָּן dwelling-place כְּ kᵊ כְּ as מִ֨שְׁפָּטֹ֔ו mˌišpāṭˈô מִשְׁפָּט justice אֲשֶׁ֥ר ʔᵃšˌer אֲשֶׁר [relative] הָרְאֵ֖יתָ hārᵊʔˌêṯā ראה see בָּ bā בְּ in † הַ the הָֽר׃ ס hˈār . s הַר mountain
26:30. et eriges tabernaculum iuxta exemplum quod tibi in monte monstratum estAnd thou shalt rear up the tabernacle according to the pattern that was shewn thee in the mount.
30. And thou shalt rear up the tabernacle according to the fashion thereof which hath been shewed thee in the mount.
And thou shalt rear up the tabernacle according to the fashion thereof which was shewed thee in the mount:

30: И поставь скинию по образцу, который показан тебе на горе.
26:30
καὶ και and; even
ἀναστήσεις ανιστημι stand up; resurrect
τὴν ο the
σκηνὴν σκηνη tent
κατὰ κατα down; by
τὸ ο the
εἶδος ειδος aspect; shape
τὸ ο the
δεδειγμένον δεικνυω show
σοι σοι you
ἐν εν in
τῷ ο the
ὄρει ορος mountain; mount
26:30
וַ wa וְ and
הֲקֵמֹתָ֖ hᵃqēmōṯˌā קום arise
אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker]
הַ ha הַ the
מִּשְׁכָּ֑ן mmiškˈān מִשְׁכָּן dwelling-place
כְּ kᵊ כְּ as
מִ֨שְׁפָּטֹ֔ו mˌišpāṭˈô מִשְׁפָּט justice
אֲשֶׁ֥ר ʔᵃšˌer אֲשֶׁר [relative]
הָרְאֵ֖יתָ hārᵊʔˌêṯā ראה see
בָּ בְּ in
הַ the
הָֽר׃ ס hˈār . s הַר mountain
26:30. et eriges tabernaculum iuxta exemplum quod tibi in monte monstratum est
And thou shalt rear up the tabernacle according to the pattern that was shewn thee in the mount.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jg▾ kad▾ tr▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
30-34: В скинии, на расстоянии 20: локтей от входа, висела завеса из такого же материала и такой же работы, как и нижние покрывала (26:1). Утвержденная на четырех, обложенных золотом, столбах из дерева ситтим, она разделяла внутренность скинии на две части: переднюю в 20: локтей длины, 10: локтей ширины и высоты, называвшуюся «святилище», и западную 10: локтей в кубе, носившую название «святое святых».
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
26:30: rear up the tabernacle: Exo 40:2, Exo 40:17, Exo 40:18; Num 10:21; Jos 18:1; Heb 8:2
according to the fashion: Exo 25:9, Exo 25:40, Exo 27:8; Act 7:44; Heb 8:5, Heb 9:23
Carl Friedrich Keil and Franz Delitzsch
26:30
"And set up the dwelling according to its right, as was shown thee upon the mountain" (cf. Ex 25:9). Even the setting up and position of the dwelling were not left to human judgment, but were to be carried out כּמשׁפּטו, i.e., according to the direction corresponding to its meaning and purpose. From the description which is given of the separate portions, it is evident that the dwelling was to be set up in the direction of the four quarters of the heavens, the back being towards the west, and the entrance to the east; whilst the whole of the dwelling formed an oblong of thirty cubits long, ten broad, and ten high. The length we obtain from the twenty boards of a cubit and a half in breadth; and the breadth, by adding to the nine cubits covered by the six boards at the back, half a cubit as the inner thickness of each of the corner beams. The thickness of the corner beams is not given, but we may conjecture that on the outside which formed part of the back they were three-quarters of a cubit thick, and that half a cubit is to be taken as the thickness towards the side. In this case, on the supposition that the side beams were a quarter of a cubit thick, the inner space would be exactly ten cubits broad and thirty and a quarter long; but the surplus quarter would be taken up by the thickness of the pillars upon which the inner curtain was hung, so that the room at the back would form a perfect cube, and the one at the front an oblong of exactly twenty cubits in length, ten in breadth, and ten in height.
John Gill
26:30 And thou shall rear up the tabernacle,.... When thus finished, and all the furniture belonging to it completed:
according to the fashion thereof, which was showed thee in the mount; this is the third time that this is observed to Moses in the account of the tabernacle; which shows how punctually God would have the pattern observed he had given him, and that all things might be particularly and exactly done according to it, see Heb 8:5.
26:3126:31: Եւ արասցես վարագո՛յր ՚ի կապուտակէ՛, եւ ՚ի ծիրանւոյ, եւ ՚ի կարմրոյ մանելոյ, եւ ՚ի բեհեզո՛յ նիւթելոյ։ գո՛րծ անկուածոյ գործեսցես զնա քերա՛ւբ։
31 Կապոյտ, ծիրանի ու կարմիր կտաւից եւ նրբահիւս բեհեզից վարագոյր կը պատրաստես: Այն կը զարդարես ասեղնագործուած քերովբէով:
31 Կապուտակէ ու ծիրանեգոյնէ եւ կրկնակի կարմիրէ ու մանուած բարակ քթանէ վարագոյր մը շինէ՛։ Անիկա վարպետի գործ պիտի ըլլայ՝ քերովբէներով։
Եւ արասցես վարագոյր ի կապուտակէ եւ ի ծիրանւոյ եւ ի կարմրոյ մանելոյ եւ ի բեհեզոյ նիւթելոյ. գործ [386]անկուածոյ գործեսցես զնա քերուբ:

26:31: Եւ արասցես վարագո՛յր ՚ի կապուտակէ՛, եւ ՚ի ծիրանւոյ, եւ ՚ի կարմրոյ մանելոյ, եւ ՚ի բեհեզո՛յ նիւթելոյ։ գո՛րծ անկուածոյ գործեսցես զնա քերա՛ւբ։
31 Կապոյտ, ծիրանի ու կարմիր կտաւից եւ նրբահիւս բեհեզից վարագոյր կը պատրաստես: Այն կը զարդարես ասեղնագործուած քերովբէով:
31 Կապուտակէ ու ծիրանեգոյնէ եւ կրկնակի կարմիրէ ու մանուած բարակ քթանէ վարագոյր մը շինէ՛։ Անիկա վարպետի գործ պիտի ըլլայ՝ քերովբէներով։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
26:3131: И сделай завесу из голубой, пурпуровой и червленой шерсти и крученого виссона; искусною работою должны быть сделаны на ней херувимы;
26:31 καὶ και and; even ποιήσεις ποιεω do; make καταπέτασμα καταπετασμα veil ἐξ εκ from; out of ὑακίνθου υακινθος hyacinth καὶ και and; even πορφύρας πορφυρα purple καὶ και and; even κοκκίνου κοκκινος scarlet κεκλωσμένου κλωθω and; even βύσσου βυσσος fine linen νενησμένης νηθω spin ἔργον εργον work ὑφαντὸν υφαντος woven ποιήσεις ποιεω do; make αὐτὸ αυτος he; him χερουβιμ χερουβ cherubim
26:31 וְ wᵊ וְ and עָשִׂ֣יתָ ʕāśˈîṯā עשׂה make פָרֹ֗כֶת fārˈōḵeṯ פָּרֹכֶת curtain תְּכֵ֧לֶת tᵊḵˈēleṯ תְּכֵלֶת purple wool וְ wᵊ וְ and אַרְגָּמָ֛ן ʔargāmˈān אַרְגָּמָן purple-wool וְ wᵊ וְ and תֹולַ֥עַת ṯôlˌaʕaṯ תֹּולַעַת worm שָׁנִ֖י šānˌî שָׁנִי scarlet וְ wᵊ וְ and שֵׁ֣שׁ šˈēš שֵׁשׁ linen מָשְׁזָ֑ר mošzˈār שׁזר twist מַעֲשֵׂ֥ה maʕᵃśˌē מַעֲשֶׂה deed חֹשֵׁ֛ב ḥōšˈēv חשׁב account יַעֲשֶׂ֥ה yaʕᵃśˌeh עשׂה make אֹתָ֖הּ ʔōṯˌāh אֵת [object marker] כְּרֻבִֽים׃ kᵊruvˈîm כְּרוּב cherub
26:31. facies et velum de hyacintho et purpura coccoque bis tincto et bysso retorta opere plumario et pulchra varietate contextumThou shalt make also a veil of violet, and purple, and scarlet twice dyed, and fine twisted linen, wrought with embroidered work and goodly variety:
31. And thou shalt make a veil of blue, and purple, and scarlet, and fine twined linen: with cherubim the work of the cunning workman shall it be made:
And thou shalt make a vail [of] blue, and purple, and scarlet, and fine twined linen of cunning work: with cherubims shall it be made:

31: И сделай завесу из голубой, пурпуровой и червленой шерсти и крученого виссона; искусною работою должны быть сделаны на ней херувимы;
26:31
καὶ και and; even
ποιήσεις ποιεω do; make
καταπέτασμα καταπετασμα veil
ἐξ εκ from; out of
ὑακίνθου υακινθος hyacinth
καὶ και and; even
πορφύρας πορφυρα purple
καὶ και and; even
κοκκίνου κοκκινος scarlet
κεκλωσμένου κλωθω and; even
βύσσου βυσσος fine linen
νενησμένης νηθω spin
ἔργον εργον work
ὑφαντὸν υφαντος woven
ποιήσεις ποιεω do; make
αὐτὸ αυτος he; him
χερουβιμ χερουβ cherubim
26:31
וְ wᵊ וְ and
עָשִׂ֣יתָ ʕāśˈîṯā עשׂה make
פָרֹ֗כֶת fārˈōḵeṯ פָּרֹכֶת curtain
תְּכֵ֧לֶת tᵊḵˈēleṯ תְּכֵלֶת purple wool
וְ wᵊ וְ and
אַרְגָּמָ֛ן ʔargāmˈān אַרְגָּמָן purple-wool
וְ wᵊ וְ and
תֹולַ֥עַת ṯôlˌaʕaṯ תֹּולַעַת worm
שָׁנִ֖י šānˌî שָׁנִי scarlet
וְ wᵊ וְ and
שֵׁ֣שׁ šˈēš שֵׁשׁ linen
מָשְׁזָ֑ר mošzˈār שׁזר twist
מַעֲשֵׂ֥ה maʕᵃśˌē מַעֲשֶׂה deed
חֹשֵׁ֛ב ḥōšˈēv חשׁב account
יַעֲשֶׂ֥ה yaʕᵃśˌeh עשׂה make
אֹתָ֖הּ ʔōṯˌāh אֵת [object marker]
כְּרֻבִֽים׃ kᵊruvˈîm כְּרוּב cherub
26:31. facies et velum de hyacintho et purpura coccoque bis tincto et bysso retorta opere plumario et pulchra varietate contextum
Thou shalt make also a veil of violet, and purple, and scarlet twice dyed, and fine twisted linen, wrought with embroidered work and goodly variety:
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jw▾ jg▾ kad▾ tr▾ ab▾ ac▾ all ▾
Adam Clarke: Commentary on the Bible - 1831
26:31: Thou shalt make a veil - פרכת parocheth, from פרך parach, to break or rend; the inner veil of the tabernacle or temple, (Ch2 3:14), which broke, interrupted, or divided between the holy place and the most holy; the Holy Ghost this signifying, that the way into the holiest of all was not yet made manifest, while as the first tabernacle was standing. Compare Heb 9:8. The Septuagint constantly render it by καταπετασμα. Does not the Hebrew name פרכת parocheth moreover intimate the typical correspondence of this veil to the body or flesh of Christ? For this καταπετασμα or veil was his flesh, (Heb 10:20), which, being rent, affords us a new and living way into the holiest of all, i.e., into heaven itself. Compare Heb 10:19, Heb 10:20; Heb 9:24. And accordingly when his blessed body was rent upon the cross, this veil also (το καταπετασμα του ἱερου) εσχισθη, was rent in twain from the top to the bottom; Mat 27:51 - See Parkhurst, under the word פרך.
The veil in the tabernacle was exceedingly costly; it was made of the same materials with the inner covering, blue, purple, scarlet, fine twined linen, embroidered with cherubim, etc. It served to divide the tabernacle into two parts: one, the outermost, called the holy place; the other, or innermost, called the holy of holies, or the most holy place. In this was deposited the ark of the covenant, and the other things that were laid up by way of memorial. Into this the high priest alone was permitted to enter, and that only once in the year, on the great day of atonement. It was in this inner place that Jehovah manifested himself between the cherubim. The Jews say that this veil was four fingers' breadth in thickness, in order to prevent any person from seeing through it; but for this, as Calmet observes, there was no necessity, as there was no window or place for light in the tabernacle, and consequently the most simple veil would have been sufficient to obstruct the discovery of any thing behind it, which could only be discerned by the light that came in at the door, or by that afforded by the golden candlestick which stood on the outside of this veil.
Albert Barnes: Notes on the Bible - 1834
26:31
Vail - Literally, separation (see Exo 35:12 note).
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
26:31: a veil of: Exo 36:35, Exo 40:3, Exo 40:21; Lev 16:2, Lev 16:15; Ch2 3:14; Mat 27:51; Mar 15:38; Luk 23:45; Eph 2:14; Heb 9:3-8, Heb 10:20, Heb 10:21
blue: Exo 25:4, Exo 35:6, Exo 35:25, Exo 35:35, Exo 36:8
purple: Argaman, a very precious colour, extracted from the purpura, or murex, a species of shell-fish; and supposed to be the same with the costly and much celebrated Tyrian purple.
scarlet: Tolaâ th; properly the worm whence the scarlet colour was produced; which grew in a coccus, or excrescence, of a shrub of the ilex kind, like the cochineal worm in the Opuntia of America; which is arranged under the same genus as the Arabic Kermez, which also denotes this colour.
cunning work: Exo 26:1, Exo 28:15, Exo 38:23; Ch2 2:7-13; Psa 137:5; Sol 7:1
cherubims shall it be made: Exo 25:18
Carl Friedrich Keil and Franz Delitzsch
26:31
To divide the dwelling into two rooms, a curtain was to be made, of the same material, and woven in the same artistic manner as the inner covering of the walls (Ex 26:1). This was called פּרכת, lit., division, separation, from פּרך to divide, or מסך פּרכת (Ex 35:12; Ex 39:34; Ex 40:21) division of the covering, i.e., to hang this "upon four pillars of gilded acacia-wood and their golden hooks, (standing) upon four silver sockets," under the loops (קרסים) which held the two halves of the inner covering together (Ex 26:6). Thus the curtain divided the dwelling into two compartments, the one occupying ten cubits and the other twenty of its entire length.
John Gill
26:31 And thou shalt make a vail,.... The use of this, as follows, was to divide the holy place from the most holy place in the tabernacle; it has its name from hardness, it being very stiff and strong, for it was made of thread six times doubled, and was four fingers thick, as the Jewish writers say: this vail may represent the sin of man, which separates between God and man, was removed by the death of Christ when the vail was rent, and so the way to heaven opened; or the obscurity of the legal dispensation, the Gospel being veiled under the shadows of the law, and the way into the holiest of all then not so manifest, and particularly the ceremonial law, which separated between Jew and Gentile, and is now abolished by the death of Christ; or rather it was typical of the human nature of Christ, his flesh, called in allusion to it the vail of his flesh, Heb 10:20. This vail was made of
blue, and purple, and scarlet, of fine twined linen of cunning work; it seems to have been made of the same materials, and in the same curious manner of workmanship with the curtains of the tabernacle, Ex 26:1, and was itself no other than a curtain, and so it is interpreted by some Jewish writers (x). It being made of "fine linen" denotes the purity of Christ, of his nature, life, and righteousness; of "twined linen", his strength, courage and steadiness; "of blue, purple, and scarlet", the several graces of the Spirit, with which his human nature was adorned, his flaming zeal for his Father's glory and the good of his people, his bloody wounds, sufferings, and death, the preciousness of his blood, the dignity of his person, and his glorious exaltation, purple and scarlet being the colours wore by kings:
with cherubim shall it be made; signifying either the ministration of angels to him in his incarnate state, or the mission of Gospel ministers by him, see Ps 139:15.
(x) Vid. R. Sol. Urbin. Ohel Moed, fol. 37. 2.
John Wesley
26:31 The veils are here ordered to be made, one for a partition between the holy place and the most holy, which not only forbad any to enter, but so much as to look into the holiest of all. Under that dispensation divine grace was veiled, but now we behold it with open face. The apostle tells us, this veil, intimated that the ceremonial law could not make the comers thereunto perfect. The way into the holiest was not made manifest while the first tabernacle was standing; life and immortality lay concealed till they were brought to light by the gospel, which was therefore signified by the rending of this veil at the death of Christ. We have now boldness to enter into the holiest in all acts of devotion by the blood of Jesus; yet such as obliges us to a holy reverence, and a humble sense of our distance. Another veil was for the outward door of the tabernacle. Through this the priests went in every day to minister in the holy - place, but not the people, Heb 9:6. This veil was all the defence the tabernacle had against thieves and robbers, which might easily be broken through, for it could be neither locked nor bared, and the abundance of wealth in it, one would think, might be a temptation. But by leaving it thus exposed, The priests and Levites would be so much the more obliged to keep a strict watch upon it: and, God would shew his care of his church on earth, though it be weak and defenceless, and continually exposed. A curtain shall be (if God please to make it so) as strong a defence, as gates of brass and bars of iron.
26:3226:32: Եւ դիցես զնա ՚ի վերայ չորեցունց անփո՛ւտ եւ ոսկիապա՛տ սեանցն. եւ խոյակք նոցա ոսկի՛ք. եւ խարիսխք նոցա արծաթի՛ք[737]։ [737] Ոմանք. Չորեցունց սեանց անփուտ եւ ոսկիապատացն։
32 Այն կ’ամրացնես կարծր փայտից շինուած եւ ոսկով պատած չորս մոյթերի վրայ: Դրանց խոյակները թող լինեն ոսկուց, իսկ խարիսխները՝ արծաթից: Վարագոյրը կը ձգես մոյթից մոյթ:
32 Զանիկա Սատիմի փայտէ չորս ոսկեպատ սիւներու վրայ դի՛ր։ Անոնց ճանկերը* ոսկի պէտք է ըլլան ու չորս արծաթ խարիսխներու վրայ թող ըլլան։
Եւ դիցես զնա ի վերայ չորեցունց անփուտ եւ ոսկիապատ սեանցն. եւ [387]խոյակք նոցա ոսկիք, եւ խարիսխք նոցա արծաթիք:

26:32: Եւ դիցես զնա ՚ի վերայ չորեցունց անփո՛ւտ եւ ոսկիապա՛տ սեանցն. եւ խոյակք նոցա ոսկի՛ք. եւ խարիսխք նոցա արծաթի՛ք[737]։
[737] Ոմանք. Չորեցունց սեանց անփուտ եւ ոսկիապատացն։
32 Այն կ’ամրացնես կարծր փայտից շինուած եւ ոսկով պատած չորս մոյթերի վրայ: Դրանց խոյակները թող լինեն ոսկուց, իսկ խարիսխները՝ արծաթից: Վարագոյրը կը ձգես մոյթից մոյթ:
32 Զանիկա Սատիմի փայտէ չորս ոսկեպատ սիւներու վրայ դի՛ր։ Անոնց ճանկերը* ոսկի պէտք է ըլլան ու չորս արծաթ խարիսխներու վրայ թող ըլլան։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
26:3232: и повесь ее на четырех столбах из ситтим, обложенных золотом, с золотыми крючками, на четырех подножиях серебряных;
26:32 καὶ και and; even ἐπιθήσεις επιτιθημι put on; put another αὐτὸ αυτος he; him ἐπὶ επι in; on τεσσάρων τεσσαρες four στύλων στυλος pillar ἀσήπτων ασηπτος gild χρυσίῳ χρυσιον gold piece; gold leaf καὶ και and; even αἱ ο the κεφαλίδες κεφαλις heading αὐτῶν αυτος he; him χρυσαῖ χρυσεος of gold; golden καὶ και and; even αἱ ο the βάσεις βασις sole of the foot αὐτῶν αυτος he; him τέσσαρες τεσσαρες four ἀργυραῖ αργυρεος of silver
26:32 וְ wᵊ וְ and נָתַתָּ֣ה nāṯattˈā נתן give אֹתָ֗הּ ʔōṯˈāh אֵת [object marker] עַל־ ʕal- עַל upon אַרְבָּעָה֙ ʔarbāʕˌā אַרְבַּע four עַמּוּדֵ֣י ʕammûḏˈê עַמּוּד pillar שִׁטִּ֔ים šiṭṭˈîm שִׁטָּה acacia מְצֻפִּ֣ים mᵊṣuppˈîm צפה arrange זָהָ֔ב zāhˈāv זָהָב gold וָוֵיהֶ֖ם wāwêhˌem וָו hook זָהָ֑ב zāhˈāv זָהָב gold עַל־ ʕal- עַל upon אַרְבָּעָ֖ה ʔarbāʕˌā אַרְבַּע four אַדְנֵי־ ʔaḏnê- אֶדֶן pedestal כָֽסֶף׃ ḵˈāsef כֶּסֶף silver
26:32. quod adpendes ante quattuor columnas de lignis setthim quae ipsae quidem deauratae erunt et habebunt capita aurea sed bases argenteasAnd thou shalt hang it up before four pillars of setim wood, which themselves also shall be overlaid with gold, and shall have heads of gold, but sockets of silver.
32. and thou shalt hang it upon four pillars of acacia overlaid with gold, their hooks of gold, upon four sockets of silver.
And thou shalt hang it upon four pillars of shittim [wood] overlaid with gold: their hooks [shall be of] gold, upon the four sockets of silver:

32: и повесь ее на четырех столбах из ситтим, обложенных золотом, с золотыми крючками, на четырех подножиях серебряных;
26:32
καὶ και and; even
ἐπιθήσεις επιτιθημι put on; put another
αὐτὸ αυτος he; him
ἐπὶ επι in; on
τεσσάρων τεσσαρες four
στύλων στυλος pillar
ἀσήπτων ασηπτος gild
χρυσίῳ χρυσιον gold piece; gold leaf
καὶ και and; even
αἱ ο the
κεφαλίδες κεφαλις heading
αὐτῶν αυτος he; him
χρυσαῖ χρυσεος of gold; golden
καὶ και and; even
αἱ ο the
βάσεις βασις sole of the foot
αὐτῶν αυτος he; him
τέσσαρες τεσσαρες four
ἀργυραῖ αργυρεος of silver
26:32
וְ wᵊ וְ and
נָתַתָּ֣ה nāṯattˈā נתן give
אֹתָ֗הּ ʔōṯˈāh אֵת [object marker]
עַל־ ʕal- עַל upon
אַרְבָּעָה֙ ʔarbāʕˌā אַרְבַּע four
עַמּוּדֵ֣י ʕammûḏˈê עַמּוּד pillar
שִׁטִּ֔ים šiṭṭˈîm שִׁטָּה acacia
מְצֻפִּ֣ים mᵊṣuppˈîm צפה arrange
זָהָ֔ב zāhˈāv זָהָב gold
וָוֵיהֶ֖ם wāwêhˌem וָו hook
זָהָ֑ב zāhˈāv זָהָב gold
עַל־ ʕal- עַל upon
אַרְבָּעָ֖ה ʔarbāʕˌā אַרְבַּע four
אַדְנֵי־ ʔaḏnê- אֶדֶן pedestal
כָֽסֶף׃ ḵˈāsef כֶּסֶף silver
26:32. quod adpendes ante quattuor columnas de lignis setthim quae ipsae quidem deauratae erunt et habebunt capita aurea sed bases argenteas
And thou shalt hang it up before four pillars of setim wood, which themselves also shall be overlaid with gold, and shall have heads of gold, but sockets of silver.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jg▾ gnv▾ tr▾ ac▾ all ▾
Adam Clarke: Commentary on the Bible - 1831
26:32: Their hooks shall be of gold - וויהם vaveyhem, which we translate their hooks, is rendered κεφαλιδες, capitals, by the Septuagint, and capita by the Vulgate. As the word וו vav or vau, plural ווים vavim, occurs only in this book, Exo 26:32, Exo 26:37; Exo 27:10, Exo 27:11, Exo 27:17; Exo 36:36, Exo 36:38; Exo 38:10, Exo 38:11, Exo 38:12, Exo 38:17, Exo 38:19, Exo 38:28; and is used in these places in reference to the same subject, it is very difficult to ascertain its precise meaning. Most commentators and lexicographers think that the ideal meaning of the word is to connect, attach, join to, hook; and that the letter ו vau has its name from its hooklike form, and its use as a particle in the Hebrew language, because it serves to connect the words and members of a sentence, and the sentences of a discourse together, and that therefore hook must be the obvious meaning of the word in all the above texts. Calmet thinks this reason of no weight, because the ו vau of the present Hebrew alphabet is widely dissimilar from the vau of the primitive Hebrew alphabet, as may be seen on the ancient shekels; on these the characters appear as in the word Jehovah, Exo 28:36. This form bears no resemblance to a hook; nor does the Samaritan vau, which appears to have been copied from this ancient character.
Calmet therefore contends,
1. That if Moses does not mean the capitals of the pillars by the ווים eht vavim of the text, he mentions them nowhere; and it would be strange that while he describes the pillars, their sockets, bases, fillets, etc., etc., with so much exactness, as will appear on consulting the preceding places, that he should make no mention of the capitals; or that pillars, every way so correctly formed, should have been destitute of this very necessary ornament.
2. As Moses was commanded to make the hooks, ווים vavim, of the pillars and their fillets of silver, Exo 27:10, Exo 27:11, and the hooks, vavim, of the pillars of the veil of gold, Exo 36:36; and as one thousand seven hundred and seventy-five shekels were employed in making these hooks, vavim, overlaying their chapiters, ראשיהם rasheyhem, their heads, and filleting them, Exo 38:28; it is more reasonable to suppose that all this is spoken of the capitals of the pillars than of any kind of hooks, especially as hooks are mentioned under the word taches or clasps in other places. On the whole it appears much more reasonable to translate the original by capitals than by hooks.
After this verse the Samaritan Pentateuch introduces the ten first verses of Exodus 30, and this appears to be their proper place. Those ten verses are not repeated in the thirtieth chapter in the Samaritan, the chapter beginning with the 11th verse.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
26:32: pillars of shittim: Exo 26:37, Exo 36:38; Est 1:6
their hooks shall be of gold: The Hebrew waveyhem, which we translate their hooks, is rendered by the LXX κεφαλιδες, and by the Vulgate, capiata, capitals. Hence Calmet contends:
1. That if Moses does not mean the capitals of the pillars by this word, he mentions them nowhere else; and it would seem strange, that while he describes them with so much exactness, that he should not mention the capitals; or that pillars every way so correctly formed, should have been destitute of this necessary ornament.
2. As Moses was commanded to make the wavim of the pillars, and their fillets, of silver (Exo 27:10, Exo 27:11), and the wavim of the pillars of the vail of gold (Exo 36:36), and that 1, 775 shekels were employed in making them, overlaying their chapiters, rasheyhem, their heads, and filleting them (Exo 38:28), it is more reasonable to suppose that all this is spoken of the capitals of pillars, than of any kind of hooks, especially as hooks are mentioned under the word taches or clasps. But as the root wavah seems to signify to connect (for yww, in Arabic, is to marry a wife), and as the letter ww, wav, if it has not its name from its hook-like form, is yet used as a connective particle, it would rather appear to denote hooks, which connected the curtains or vails to the pillars. The LXX also render it αγκυλαι, "handles", and κρικοι, "rings" or "clasps".
Geneva 1599
26:32 And thou shalt hang it upon four pillars of shittim [wood] overlaid with gold: their (k) hooks [shall be of] gold, upon the four sockets of silver.
(k) Some read "heads of the pillars".
John Gill
26:32 And thou shalt hang it upon four pillars of shittim wood, overlaid with gold,.... For it was ten cubits long, and as many broad; and being of such a stiffness and thickness as it was, required so many pillars to support it: these pillars may signify the deity of Christ, which is the support of his human nature, and in which it has its personal subsistence, and gives all its actions and sufferings virtue and efficacy; and being of "shittim wood", which is incorruptible, may denote his eternity, and being covered with gold, his glory:
their hooks shall be of gold; which were upon the tops of the pillars on which the vail was hung: and the pillars were
upon the four sockets of silver; which were properly the pedestals or feet of the pillars; and these sockets, into which the pillars were let and placed, and the hooks the vail hung by, may hint to the union of the two natures in Christ, who is God and man in one person, God manifest in the flesh; see Song 5:15.
26:3326:33: Եւ ձգեսցե՛ս զվարագոյրն սիւնէ ՚ի սիւն։ Եւ տարցիս ՚ի նե՛րքս քան զվարագոյրն զտապանակ վկայութեանն. եւ անջրպետիցէ՛ ձեզ վարագոյրն ՚ի մէջ սրբութեանն, եւ ՚ի մէջ սրբութեա՛ն սրբութեանցն։
33 Վկայութեան տապանակը կը տանես այնտեղ, վարագոյրի ներսի կողմը, եւ վարագոյրը ձեզ համար սրբութիւնը կ’առանձնացնի սրբութիւնների սրբութիւնից:
33 Վարագոյրը ճարմանդներէն վար կախէ՛ ու հոն վարագոյրին ներսի կողմը վկայութեան տապանակը բեր։ Վարագոյրը ձեզ պիտի բաժնէ սրբութիւնին ու սրբութիւն սրբութեանցին մէջտեղ։
Եւ ձգեսցես զվարագոյրն [388]սիւնէ ի սիւն``, եւ տարցիս ի ներքս քան զվարագոյրն զտապանակ վկայութեանն. եւ անջրպետիցէ ձեզ վարագոյրն ի մէջ սրբութեանն, եւ ի մէջ սրբութեան սրբութեանցն:

26:33: Եւ ձգեսցե՛ս զվարագոյրն սիւնէ ՚ի սիւն։ Եւ տարցիս ՚ի նե՛րքս քան զվարագոյրն զտապանակ վկայութեանն. եւ անջրպետիցէ՛ ձեզ վարագոյրն ՚ի մէջ սրբութեանն, եւ ՚ի մէջ սրբութեա՛ն սրբութեանցն։
33 Վկայութեան տապանակը կը տանես այնտեղ, վարագոյրի ներսի կողմը, եւ վարագոյրը ձեզ համար սրբութիւնը կ’առանձնացնի սրբութիւնների սրբութիւնից:
33 Վարագոյրը ճարմանդներէն վար կախէ՛ ու հոն վարագոյրին ներսի կողմը վկայութեան տապանակը բեր։ Վարագոյրը ձեզ պիտի բաժնէ սրբութիւնին ու սրբութիւն սրբութեանցին մէջտեղ։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
26:3333: и повесь завесу на крючках и внеси туда за завесу ковчег откровения; и будет завеса отделять вам святилище от Святаго-святых.
26:33 καὶ και and; even θήσεις τιθημι put; make τὸ ο the καταπέτασμα καταπετασμα veil ἐπὶ επι in; on τοὺς ο the στύλους στυλος pillar καὶ και and; even εἰσοίσεις εισφερω bring in ἐκεῖ εκει there ἐσώτερον εσωτερος inner τοῦ ο the καταπετάσματος καταπετασμα veil τὴν ο the κιβωτὸν κιβωτος ark τοῦ ο the μαρτυρίου μαρτυριον evidence; testimony καὶ και and; even διοριεῖ διοριζω the καταπέτασμα καταπετασμα veil ὑμῖν υμιν you ἀνὰ ανα.1 up; each μέσον μεσος in the midst; in the middle τοῦ ο the ἁγίου αγιος holy καὶ και and; even ἀνὰ ανα.1 up; each μέσον μεσος in the midst; in the middle τοῦ ο the ἁγίου αγιος holy τῶν ο the ἁγίων αγιος holy
26:33 וְ wᵊ וְ and נָתַתָּ֣ה nāṯattˈā נתן give אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] הַ ha הַ the פָּרֹכֶת֮ ppārōḵeṯ פָּרֹכֶת curtain תַּ֣חַת tˈaḥaṯ תַּחַת under part הַ ha הַ the קְּרָסִים֒ qqᵊrāsîm קֶרֶס hook וְ wᵊ וְ and הֵבֵאתָ֥ hēvēṯˌā בוא come שָׁ֨מָּה֙ šˈāmmā שָׁם there מִ mi מִן from בֵּ֣ית bbˈêṯ בַּיִת house לַ la לְ to † הַ the פָּרֹ֔כֶת ppārˈōḵeṯ פָּרֹכֶת curtain אֵ֖ת ʔˌēṯ אֵת [object marker] אֲרֹ֣ון ʔᵃrˈôn אֲרֹון ark הָ hā הַ the עֵד֑וּת ʕēḏˈûṯ עֵדוּת reminder וְ wᵊ וְ and הִבְדִּילָ֤ה hivdîlˈā בדל separate הַ ha הַ the פָּרֹ֨כֶת֙ ppārˈōḵeṯ פָּרֹכֶת curtain לָכֶ֔ם lāḵˈem לְ to בֵּ֣ין bˈên בַּיִן interval הַ ha הַ the קֹּ֔דֶשׁ qqˈōḏeš קֹדֶשׁ holiness וּ û וְ and בֵ֖ין vˌên בַּיִן interval קֹ֥דֶשׁ qˌōḏeš קֹדֶשׁ holiness הַ ha הַ the קֳּדָשִֽׁים׃ qqᵒḏāšˈîm קֹדֶשׁ holiness
26:33. inseretur autem velum per circulos intra quod pones arcam testimonii et quo sanctuarium et sanctuarii sanctuaria dividenturAnd the veil shall be hanged on with rings, and within it thou shalt put the ark of the testimony, and the sanctuary and the holy of the holies shall be divided with it.
33. And thou shalt hang up the veil under the clasps, and shalt bring in thither within the veil the ark of the testimony: and the veil shall divide unto you between the holy place and the most holy.
And thou shalt hang up the vail under the taches, that thou mayest bring in thither within the vail the ark of the testimony: and the vail shall divide unto you between the holy [place] and the most holy:

33: и повесь завесу на крючках и внеси туда за завесу ковчег откровения; и будет завеса отделять вам святилище от Святаго-святых.
26:33
καὶ και and; even
θήσεις τιθημι put; make
τὸ ο the
καταπέτασμα καταπετασμα veil
ἐπὶ επι in; on
τοὺς ο the
στύλους στυλος pillar
καὶ και and; even
εἰσοίσεις εισφερω bring in
ἐκεῖ εκει there
ἐσώτερον εσωτερος inner
τοῦ ο the
καταπετάσματος καταπετασμα veil
τὴν ο the
κιβωτὸν κιβωτος ark
τοῦ ο the
μαρτυρίου μαρτυριον evidence; testimony
καὶ και and; even
διοριεῖ διοριζω the
καταπέτασμα καταπετασμα veil
ὑμῖν υμιν you
ἀνὰ ανα.1 up; each
μέσον μεσος in the midst; in the middle
τοῦ ο the
ἁγίου αγιος holy
καὶ και and; even
ἀνὰ ανα.1 up; each
μέσον μεσος in the midst; in the middle
τοῦ ο the
ἁγίου αγιος holy
τῶν ο the
ἁγίων αγιος holy
26:33
וְ wᵊ וְ and
נָתַתָּ֣ה nāṯattˈā נתן give
אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker]
הַ ha הַ the
פָּרֹכֶת֮ ppārōḵeṯ פָּרֹכֶת curtain
תַּ֣חַת tˈaḥaṯ תַּחַת under part
הַ ha הַ the
קְּרָסִים֒ qqᵊrāsîm קֶרֶס hook
וְ wᵊ וְ and
הֵבֵאתָ֥ hēvēṯˌā בוא come
שָׁ֨מָּה֙ šˈāmmā שָׁם there
מִ mi מִן from
בֵּ֣ית bbˈêṯ בַּיִת house
לַ la לְ to
הַ the
פָּרֹ֔כֶת ppārˈōḵeṯ פָּרֹכֶת curtain
אֵ֖ת ʔˌēṯ אֵת [object marker]
אֲרֹ֣ון ʔᵃrˈôn אֲרֹון ark
הָ הַ the
עֵד֑וּת ʕēḏˈûṯ עֵדוּת reminder
וְ wᵊ וְ and
הִבְדִּילָ֤ה hivdîlˈā בדל separate
הַ ha הַ the
פָּרֹ֨כֶת֙ ppārˈōḵeṯ פָּרֹכֶת curtain
לָכֶ֔ם lāḵˈem לְ to
בֵּ֣ין bˈên בַּיִן interval
הַ ha הַ the
קֹּ֔דֶשׁ qqˈōḏeš קֹדֶשׁ holiness
וּ û וְ and
בֵ֖ין vˌên בַּיִן interval
קֹ֥דֶשׁ qˌōḏeš קֹדֶשׁ holiness
הַ ha הַ the
קֳּדָשִֽׁים׃ qqᵒḏāšˈîm קֹדֶשׁ holiness
26:33. inseretur autem velum per circulos intra quod pones arcam testimonii et quo sanctuarium et sanctuarii sanctuaria dividentur
And the veil shall be hanged on with rings, and within it thou shalt put the ark of the testimony, and the sanctuary and the holy of the holies shall be divided with it.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jg▾ gnv▾ kad▾ tr▾ ab▾ all ▾
Albert Barnes: Notes on the Bible - 1834
26:33
Taches - Not the same as the hooks of the preceding verse, but the clasps of the tabernacle-cloth (see Exo 26:6).
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
26:33: the taches: Exo 27:10, Exo 36:36
within the veil: Gen 9:4, Gen 9:5
the ark of the testimony: Exo 25:16, Exo 40:21
the holy place: Lev 16:2; Kg1 8:6, Kg1 8:10; Ch2 5:7-10; Heb 9:2, Heb 9:3
Carl Friedrich Keil and Franz Delitzsch
26:33
"Thither (where the curtain hands under the loops) within the curtain shalt thou bring the ark of testimony (Ex 25:16-22), and the curtain shall divide unto you between the holy place and the most holy" (הקּדשׁים קדשׁ the holy of holies). The inner compartment was made into the most holy place through the ark of the covenant with the throne of grace upon it.
Geneva 1599
26:33 And thou shalt hang up the vail under the taches, that thou mayest bring in thither within the vail the ark of the testimony: and the vail shall divide unto you between the holy [place] and the (l) most holy.
(l) In which only the high priest entered and only once a year.
John Gill
26:33 And thou shall hang up the vail under the taches,.... Or clasps, which coupled the two grand curtains, or pieces of tapestry, each consisting of five curtains, of which the tabernacle was made, Ex 26:6, and by this it seems that the place where they met, and were clasped, was where the vail was hung between the holy and the most holy place: for, as Dr. Lightfoot (y) observes, according to the division of the house was the division of the curtains, the vail that parted the holy from the most holy was hung just under the golden clasps that knit the five curtains together; so that five curtains lay over the holy place, and the other five over the most holy; but with this difference, the holy place was ten yards long, and the five curtains sewed together were just so broad, and so they covered only the top and sides, but hung not down at the end which was eastward; but the most holy was but five yards long, and the five curtains over that did not only cover the top, but also hung down at the west end to the silver bases; and of what he says of the goat hair curtains, and their brazen clasps or taches, and where they met, and what they covered; see Gill on Ex 26:12,
that thou mayest bring in thither within the vail the ark of the testimony; the ark in which the testimony or law of God, testifying his will, was put; of which see Ex 25:10, &c. this was to be set in the most holy place, as being holy, spiritual, just, and good; and as being fulfilled by Christ, signified by the ark in which it was, through whose righteousness alone there is admission into the holy of holies, by which this law is fulfilled, magnified, and made honourable:
and the vail shall divide unto you between the holy place and the most holy; which was so thick, that there was no seeing through it; and none might enter by it into the holiest of all but the high priest, and he only on the day of atonement; and into the holy place might none come but the priests, to do the service of the sanctuary. The holy place was typical of the church on earth, where all the saints, who are priests to God, worship, and the most holy of heaven, the perfect state of bliss and happiness.
(y) Works, vol, 1. p. 718.
26:3426:34: Եւ ծածկեսցե՛ս վարագուրաւն զտապանակ վկայութեանն ՚ի սրբութիւն սրբութեանցն։
34 Սրբութիւնների սրբութեան տեղում վկայութեան տապանակը կը ծածկես վարագոյրով:
34 Եւ քաւութիւնը վկայութեան տապանակին վրայ՝ սրբութիւն սրբութեանցին մէջ դի՛ր։
Եւ [389]ծածկեսցես վարագուրաւն զտապանակ`` վկայութեանն ի սրբութիւն սրբութեանցն:

26:34: Եւ ծածկեսցե՛ս վարագուրաւն զտապանակ վկայութեանն ՚ի սրբութիւն սրբութեանցն։
34 Սրբութիւնների սրբութեան տեղում վկայութեան տապանակը կը ծածկես վարագոյրով:
34 Եւ քաւութիւնը վկայութեան տապանակին վրայ՝ սրբութիւն սրբութեանցին մէջ դի՛ր։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
26:3434: И положи крышку на ковчег откровения во Святом-святых.
26:34 καὶ και and; even κατακαλύψεις κατακαλυπτω veil τῷ ο the καταπετάσματι καταπετασμα veil τὴν ο the κιβωτὸν κιβωτος ark τοῦ ο the μαρτυρίου μαρτυριον evidence; testimony ἐν εν in τῷ ο the ἁγίῳ αγιος holy τῶν ο the ἁγίων αγιος holy
26:34 וְ wᵊ וְ and נָתַתָּ֙ nāṯattˌā נתן give אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] הַ ha הַ the כַּפֹּ֔רֶת kkappˈōreṯ כַּפֹּרֶת cover עַ֖ל ʕˌal עַל upon אֲרֹ֣ון ʔᵃrˈôn אֲרֹון ark הָ hā הַ the עֵדֻ֑ת ʕēḏˈuṯ עֵדוּת reminder בְּ bᵊ בְּ in קֹ֖דֶשׁ qˌōḏeš קֹדֶשׁ holiness הַ ha הַ the קֳּדָשִֽׁים׃ qqᵒḏāšˈîm קֹדֶשׁ holiness
26:34. pones et propitiatorium super arcam testimonii in sancta sanctorumAnd thou shalt set the propitiatory upon the ark of the testimony, in the holy of holies.
34. And thou shalt put the mercy-seat upon the ark of the testimony in the most holy place.
And thou shalt put the mercy seat upon the ark of the testimony in the most holy:

34: И положи крышку на ковчег откровения во Святом-святых.
26:34
καὶ και and; even
κατακαλύψεις κατακαλυπτω veil
τῷ ο the
καταπετάσματι καταπετασμα veil
τὴν ο the
κιβωτὸν κιβωτος ark
τοῦ ο the
μαρτυρίου μαρτυριον evidence; testimony
ἐν εν in
τῷ ο the
ἁγίῳ αγιος holy
τῶν ο the
ἁγίων αγιος holy
26:34
וְ wᵊ וְ and
נָתַתָּ֙ nāṯattˌā נתן give
אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker]
הַ ha הַ the
כַּפֹּ֔רֶת kkappˈōreṯ כַּפֹּרֶת cover
עַ֖ל ʕˌal עַל upon
אֲרֹ֣ון ʔᵃrˈôn אֲרֹון ark
הָ הַ the
עֵדֻ֑ת ʕēḏˈuṯ עֵדוּת reminder
בְּ bᵊ בְּ in
קֹ֖דֶשׁ qˌōḏeš קֹדֶשׁ holiness
הַ ha הַ the
קֳּדָשִֽׁים׃ qqᵒḏāšˈîm קֹדֶשׁ holiness
26:34. pones et propitiatorium super arcam testimonii in sancta sanctorum
And thou shalt set the propitiatory upon the ark of the testimony, in the holy of holies.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jg▾ tr▾ ab▾ all ▾
Albert Barnes: Notes on the Bible - 1834
26:34-35
See Exo 25:10-16, Exo 25:23, Exo 25:31.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
26:34: put the mercy seat: Exo 25:21, Exo 40:20; Heb 9:5
John Gill
26:34 And thou shalt put the mercy seat upon ark of the testimony,.... With the cherubim of glory overshadowing it; all which were a representation of the way of man's salvation flowing from the mercy and grace of God, through the propitiation by Christ, and his perfect righteousness, by which the law is fulfilled; and all this is published in the Gospel by the ministers of it, signified by the cherubim: and these are all the things that were "in the most holy place"; and they were placed at the west end of it.
26:3526:35: Եւ դիցես զսեղանն արտաքոյ վարագուրին։ եւ զաշտանակն յանդիմա՛ն սեղանոյն, ՚ի կողմանէ խորանին ընդ հարաւ։ եւ զսեղանն դիցես ՚ի կողմանէ խորանին ընդ հիւսւսի։
35 Զոհասեղանը կը դնես վարագոյրի դրսի կողմը, իսկ աշտանակը՝ զոհասեղանի դիմաց, վրանի հարաւային կողմում: Զոհասեղանը կը դնես վրանի հիւսիսային կողմում:
35 Վարագոյրին դուրսիդին սեղանը ու սեղանին դէմ խորանին հարաւային կողմը՝ աշտանակը դի՛ր ու սեղանը հիւսիսային կողմը դի՛ր։
Եւ դիցես զսեղանն արտաքոյ վարագուրին, եւ զաշտանակն յանդիման սեղանոյն` ի կողմանէ խորանին ընդ հարաւ. եւ զսեղանն դիցես ի կողմանէ [390]խորանին ընդ հիւսիսի:

26:35: Եւ դիցես զսեղանն արտաքոյ վարագուրին։ եւ զաշտանակն յանդիմա՛ն սեղանոյն, ՚ի կողմանէ խորանին ընդ հարաւ։ եւ զսեղանն դիցես ՚ի կողմանէ խորանին ընդ հիւսւսի։
35 Զոհասեղանը կը դնես վարագոյրի դրսի կողմը, իսկ աշտանակը՝ զոհասեղանի դիմաց, վրանի հարաւային կողմում: Զոհասեղանը կը դնես վրանի հիւսիսային կողմում:
35 Վարագոյրին դուրսիդին սեղանը ու սեղանին դէմ խորանին հարաւային կողմը՝ աշտանակը դի՛ր ու սեղանը հիւսիսային կողմը դի՛ր։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
26:3535: И поставь стол вне завесы и светильник против стола на стороне скинии к югу; стол же поставь на северной стороне.
26:35 καὶ και and; even θήσεις τιθημι put; make τὴν ο the τράπεζαν τραπεζα table; bank ἔξωθεν εξωθεν from outside; outer τοῦ ο the καταπετάσματος καταπετασμα veil καὶ και and; even τὴν ο the λυχνίαν λυχνια lamp stand ἀπέναντι απεναντι before; contrary τῆς ο the τραπέζης τραπεζα table; bank ἐπὶ επι in; on μέρους μερος part; in particular τῆς ο the σκηνῆς σκηνη tent τὸ ο the πρὸς προς to; toward νότον νοτος south wind καὶ και and; even τὴν ο the τράπεζαν τραπεζα table; bank θήσεις τιθημι put; make ἐπὶ επι in; on μέρους μερος part; in particular τῆς ο the σκηνῆς σκηνη tent τὸ ο the πρὸς προς to; toward βορρᾶν βορρας north wind
26:35 וְ wᵊ וְ and שַׂמְתָּ֤ śamtˈā שׂים put אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] הַ ha הַ the שֻּׁלְחָן֙ ššulḥˌān שֻׁלְחָן table מִ mi מִן from ח֣וּץ ḥˈûṣ חוּץ outside לַ la לְ to † הַ the פָּרֹ֔כֶת ppārˈōḵeṯ פָּרֹכֶת curtain וְ wᵊ וְ and אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker] הַ ha הַ the מְּנֹרָה֙ mmᵊnōrˌā מְנֹורָה lamp stand נֹ֣כַח nˈōḵaḥ נֹכַח straightness הַ ha הַ the שֻּׁלְחָ֔ן ššulḥˈān שֻׁלְחָן table עַ֛ל ʕˈal עַל upon צֶ֥לַע ṣˌelaʕ צֵלָע side הַ ha הַ the מִּשְׁכָּ֖ן mmiškˌān מִשְׁכָּן dwelling-place תֵּימָ֑נָה têmˈānā תֵּימָן south וְ wᵊ וְ and הַ֨ hˌa הַ the שֻּׁלְחָ֔ן ššulḥˈān שֻׁלְחָן table תִּתֵּ֖ן tittˌēn נתן give עַל־ ʕal- עַל upon צֶ֥לַע ṣˌelaʕ צֵלָע side צָפֹֽון׃ ṣāfˈôn צָפֹון north
26:35. mensamque extra velum et contra mensam candelabrum in latere tabernaculi meridiano mensa enim stabit in parte aquilonisAnd the table without the veil, and over against the table the candlestick in the south side of the tabernacle: for the table shall stand in the north side.
35. And thou shalt set the table without the veil, and the candlestick over against the table on the side of the tabernacle toward the south: and thou shalt put the table on the north side.
And thou shalt set the table without the vail, and the candlestick over against the table on the side of the tabernacle toward the south: and thou shalt put the table on the north side:

35: И поставь стол вне завесы и светильник против стола на стороне скинии к югу; стол же поставь на северной стороне.
26:35
καὶ και and; even
θήσεις τιθημι put; make
τὴν ο the
τράπεζαν τραπεζα table; bank
ἔξωθεν εξωθεν from outside; outer
τοῦ ο the
καταπετάσματος καταπετασμα veil
καὶ και and; even
τὴν ο the
λυχνίαν λυχνια lamp stand
ἀπέναντι απεναντι before; contrary
τῆς ο the
τραπέζης τραπεζα table; bank
ἐπὶ επι in; on
μέρους μερος part; in particular
τῆς ο the
σκηνῆς σκηνη tent
τὸ ο the
πρὸς προς to; toward
νότον νοτος south wind
καὶ και and; even
τὴν ο the
τράπεζαν τραπεζα table; bank
θήσεις τιθημι put; make
ἐπὶ επι in; on
μέρους μερος part; in particular
τῆς ο the
σκηνῆς σκηνη tent
τὸ ο the
πρὸς προς to; toward
βορρᾶν βορρας north wind
26:35
וְ wᵊ וְ and
שַׂמְתָּ֤ śamtˈā שׂים put
אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker]
הַ ha הַ the
שֻּׁלְחָן֙ ššulḥˌān שֻׁלְחָן table
מִ mi מִן from
ח֣וּץ ḥˈûṣ חוּץ outside
לַ la לְ to
הַ the
פָּרֹ֔כֶת ppārˈōḵeṯ פָּרֹכֶת curtain
וְ wᵊ וְ and
אֶת־ ʔeṯ- אֵת [object marker]
הַ ha הַ the
מְּנֹרָה֙ mmᵊnōrˌā מְנֹורָה lamp stand
נֹ֣כַח nˈōḵaḥ נֹכַח straightness
הַ ha הַ the
שֻּׁלְחָ֔ן ššulḥˈān שֻׁלְחָן table
עַ֛ל ʕˈal עַל upon
צֶ֥לַע ṣˌelaʕ צֵלָע side
הַ ha הַ the
מִּשְׁכָּ֖ן mmiškˌān מִשְׁכָּן dwelling-place
תֵּימָ֑נָה têmˈānā תֵּימָן south
וְ wᵊ וְ and
הַ֨ hˌa הַ the
שֻּׁלְחָ֔ן ššulḥˈān שֻׁלְחָן table
תִּתֵּ֖ן tittˌēn נתן give
עַל־ ʕal- עַל upon
צֶ֥לַע ṣˌelaʕ צֵלָע side
צָפֹֽון׃ ṣāfˈôn צָפֹון north
26:35. mensamque extra velum et contra mensam candelabrum in latere tabernaculi meridiano mensa enim stabit in parte aquilonis
And the table without the veil, and over against the table the candlestick in the south side of the tabernacle: for the table shall stand in the north side.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jg▾ gnv▾ kad▾ tr▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
35: О принадлежности святилища — жертвеннике каждений говорится, что он стоял перед завесой, которая «пред ковчегом откровения, против крышки, которая на ковчеге откровения» (30:6; 40:5); он является как бы предваряющим ковчег завета, стоит на переходе от святилища к святому святых. Если же о двух других принадлежностях — столе и светильнике замечается, что они были вне завесы, то это значит, что они стояли дальше от завесы, чем жертвенник и не по средине широты скинии, а по сторонам, один направо, другой налево от жертвенника.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
26:35: the table: Exo 40:22; Heb 9:2, Heb 9:8, Heb 9:9
the candlestick: Exo 25:31-37, Exo 40:24
Carl Friedrich Keil and Franz Delitzsch
26:35
The two other things (already described) were to be placed outside the curtain, viz., in the holy place; the candlestick opposite to the table, the former on the south side of the dwelling, the latter towards the north.
Geneva 1599
26:35 And thou shalt set the table (m) without the vail, and the candlestick over against the table on the side of the tabernacle toward the south: and thou shalt put the table on the north side.
(m) Meaning, in the holy place.
John Gill
26:35 And thou shalt set the table without the vail,.... The table of shewbread, of which see Ex 25:23, this was not to be within the vail, but without it, in the holy place: and the candlestick opposite the table, of which see Ex 25:31, &c. signifying, that in the church of God, in the present state of things, which the holy place was an emblem of, there are both food and light: the candlestick was placed
on the side of the tabernacle, toward the south; according to Jarchi, two cubits and a half from the side of it:
and thou shalt put the table on the north side; of the tabernacle, directly opposite the candlestick, two cubits and a half from the south side, as the same writer says;
26:3626:36: Եւ արասցես սրահա՛կ դրան խորանին. ՚ի կապուտակէ՛, եւ ՚ի ծիրանւոյ, եւ ՚ի կարմրոյ մանելոյ, եւ ՚ի բեհեզոյ նիւթելոյ. գործ նկարակե՛րպ։
36 Կապոյտ, ծիրանի ու կարմիր կտաւից եւ նրբահիւս բեհեզից կը պատրաստես վրանի դռան առագաստը՝ նկարազարդ մի գործ:
36 Վրանին դրանը կապուտակէ ու ծիրանեգոյնէ եւ կրկնակի կարմիրէ ու մանուած բարակ քթանէ նկարագործ դրան վարագոյր մը շինէ՛։
Եւ արասցես սրահակ դրան խորանին ի կապուտակէ եւ ի ծիրանւոյ եւ ի կարմրոյ մանելոյ եւ ի բեհեզոյ նիւթելոյ, գործ նկարակերպ:

26:36: Եւ արասցես սրահա՛կ դրան խորանին. ՚ի կապուտակէ՛, եւ ՚ի ծիրանւոյ, եւ ՚ի կարմրոյ մանելոյ, եւ ՚ի բեհեզոյ նիւթելոյ. գործ նկարակե՛րպ։
36 Կապոյտ, ծիրանի ու կարմիր կտաւից եւ նրբահիւս բեհեզից կը պատրաստես վրանի դռան առագաստը՝ նկարազարդ մի գործ:
36 Վրանին դրանը կապուտակէ ու ծիրանեգոյնէ եւ կրկնակի կարմիրէ ու մանուած բարակ քթանէ նկարագործ դրան վարագոյր մը շինէ՛։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
26:3636: И сделай завесу для входа в скинию из голубой и пурпуровой и червленой [шерсти] и из крученого виссона узорчатой работы;
26:36 καὶ και and; even ποιήσεις ποιεω do; make ἐπίσπαστρον επισπαστρον from; out of ὑακίνθου υακινθος hyacinth καὶ και and; even πορφύρας πορφυρα purple καὶ και and; even κοκκίνου κοκκινος scarlet κεκλωσμένου κλωθω and; even βύσσου βυσσος fine linen κεκλωσμένης κλωθω work ποικιλτοῦ ποικιλτης broiderer
26:36 וְ wᵊ וְ and עָשִׂ֤יתָ ʕāśˈîṯā עשׂה make מָסָךְ֙ māsāḵ מָסָךְ covering לְ lᵊ לְ to פֶ֣תַח fˈeṯaḥ פֶּתַח opening הָ hā הַ the אֹ֔הֶל ʔˈōhel אֹהֶל tent תְּכֵ֧לֶת tᵊḵˈēleṯ תְּכֵלֶת purple wool וְ wᵊ וְ and אַרְגָּמָ֛ן ʔargāmˈān אַרְגָּמָן purple-wool וְ wᵊ וְ and תֹולַ֥עַת ṯôlˌaʕaṯ תֹּולַעַת worm שָׁנִ֖י šānˌî שָׁנִי scarlet וְ wᵊ וְ and שֵׁ֣שׁ šˈēš שֵׁשׁ linen מָשְׁזָ֑ר mošzˈār שׁזר twist מַעֲשֵׂ֖ה maʕᵃśˌē מַעֲשֶׂה deed רֹקֵֽם׃ rōqˈēm רקם weave
26:36. facies et tentorium in introitu tabernaculi de hyacintho et purpura coccoque bis tincto et bysso retorta opere plumariiThou shalt make also a hanging in the entrance of the tabernacle of violet, and purple, and scarlet twice dyed, and fine twisted linen with embroidered work.
36. And thou shalt make a screen for the door of the Tent, of blue, and purple, and scarlet, and fine twined linen, the work of the embroiderer.
And thou shalt make an hanging for the door of the tent, [of] blue, and purple, and scarlet, and fine twined linen, wrought with needlework:

36: И сделай завесу для входа в скинию из голубой и пурпуровой и червленой [шерсти] и из крученого виссона узорчатой работы;
26:36
καὶ και and; even
ποιήσεις ποιεω do; make
ἐπίσπαστρον επισπαστρον from; out of
ὑακίνθου υακινθος hyacinth
καὶ και and; even
πορφύρας πορφυρα purple
καὶ και and; even
κοκκίνου κοκκινος scarlet
κεκλωσμένου κλωθω and; even
βύσσου βυσσος fine linen
κεκλωσμένης κλωθω work
ποικιλτοῦ ποικιλτης broiderer
26:36
וְ wᵊ וְ and
עָשִׂ֤יתָ ʕāśˈîṯā עשׂה make
מָסָךְ֙ māsāḵ מָסָךְ covering
לְ lᵊ לְ to
פֶ֣תַח fˈeṯaḥ פֶּתַח opening
הָ הַ the
אֹ֔הֶל ʔˈōhel אֹהֶל tent
תְּכֵ֧לֶת tᵊḵˈēleṯ תְּכֵלֶת purple wool
וְ wᵊ וְ and
אַרְגָּמָ֛ן ʔargāmˈān אַרְגָּמָן purple-wool
וְ wᵊ וְ and
תֹולַ֥עַת ṯôlˌaʕaṯ תֹּולַעַת worm
שָׁנִ֖י šānˌî שָׁנִי scarlet
וְ wᵊ וְ and
שֵׁ֣שׁ šˈēš שֵׁשׁ linen
מָשְׁזָ֑ר mošzˈār שׁזר twist
מַעֲשֵׂ֖ה maʕᵃśˌē מַעֲשֶׂה deed
רֹקֵֽם׃ rōqˈēm רקם weave
26:36. facies et tentorium in introitu tabernaculi de hyacintho et purpura coccoque bis tincto et bysso retorta opere plumarii
Thou shalt make also a hanging in the entrance of the tabernacle of violet, and purple, and scarlet twice dyed, and fine twisted linen with embroidered work.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jfb▾ jg▾ gnv▾ kad▾ tr▾ ab▾ ac▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
36: На входной восточной стороне скинии деревянной стены не было. Ее не закрывали и покровы: нижний совсем не свешивался на восточную сторону, а второй спускался небольшой частью. В виду этого для заграждения восточной стороны и для образования входа во святилище здесь была распростерта радужная завеса, не отличавшаяся по материалу от завесы двора. По свидетельству Иосифа Флавия, она простиралась сверху только до половины стен скинии. Но это указание понимают в том смысле, что завеса имела особые приспособления в виде петлей и крючков, при помощи которых она приподнималась на время богослужения.
Adam Clarke: Commentary on the Bible - 1831
26:36: A hanging for the door of the tent - This may be called the first veil, as it occupied the door or entrance to the tabernacle; the veil that separated the holy place from the holy of holies is called the second veil, Heb 9:3. These two veils and the inner covering of the tabernacle were all of the same materials, and of the same workmanship. See Exo 27:16.
1. For the meaning and design of the tabernacle see Clarke's note on Exo 25:40 : and while the reader is struck with the curious and costly nature of this building, as described by Moses, let him consider how pure and holy that Church should be of which it was a very expressive type; and what manner of person he should be in all holy conversation and godliness, who professes to be a member of that Church for which, it is written, Christ has given himself, that he might sanctify and cleanse it; that he might present it unto himself a glorious Church, not having spot, or wrinkle, or any such thing; but that it should be holy and without blemish. See Eph 5:25-27.
2. In the Jewish tabernacle almost every thing was placed out of the sight of the people. The holy of holies was inaccessible, the testimony was comparatively hidden, as were also the mercy-seat and the Divine glory. Under the Gospel all these things are laid open, the way to the holiest is made manifest, the veil is rent, and we have an entrance to the holiest by the blood of Jesus, by a new and living way, which he hath consecrated for us, through the veil, that is to say, his flesh; Heb 10:19, Heb 10:20. How abundantly has God brought life and immortality to light by the Gospel! The awful distance is abolished, the ministry of reconciliation is proclaimed, the kingdom of heaven is opened to all believers, and the Lord is in his holy temple. Sinner, weary of thyself and thy transgressions, fainting under the load of thy iniquities, look to Jesus; he died for thee, and will save thee. Believer, stand fast in the liberty wherewith God has made thee free, and be not entangled again in the yoke of bondage.
Albert Barnes: Notes on the Bible - 1834
26:36
The door of the tent - The entrance to the tent, closed by the "hanging" or curtain Exo 27:16.
Wrought with needlework. - The work of the embroiderer. The entrance curtain of the tent and that of the court Exo 27:16 were to be of the same materials, but embroidered with the needle, not made in figures in the loom (see Exo 26:1; Exo 35:35).
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
26:36: hanging: This may be termed the first vail, as it occupied the door or entrance to the tabernacle; the vail that separated the Holy of Holies is called the second vail, Heb 9:3. Mr. Morier (Second Journey Through Persia, p. 251), describing the tent of a chief of the Eelauts, says, "It was composed of a wooden frame of circular laths, which were fixed on the ground, and then covered over with large felts, that were fastened down by a cord, ornamented by tassels of various colours. A curtain, curiously worked by the women, with coarse needle-work of various colours, was suspended over the door. In the king of Persia's tents, magnificent perdahs, or hangings of needle-work, are suspended, as well as on the doors of the great mosques in Turkey; and these circumstances combined, will, perhaps, illustrate Exo 26:36." Exo 36:37, Exo 40:28; Joh 10:9, Joh 14:6
the tent: Exo 35:11, Exo 39:33, Exo 40:29; Num 3:25, Num 9:15; Sa2 7:6; Psa 78:60
of blue: Exo 26:31
Carl Friedrich Keil and Franz Delitzsch
26:36
For the entrance to the tent they were also to make a curtain (מסך, lit., a covering, from סכך to cover) of the same material as the inner curtain, but of work in mixed colours, i.e., not woven with figures upon it, but simply in stripes or checks. רקם מעשׂה does not mean coloured needlework, with figures or flowers embroidered with the needle upon the woven fabric (as I asserted in my Archologie, in common with the Rabbins, Gesenius, Bhr, and others); for in the only other passage in which רקם occurs, viz., Ps 139:15, it does not mean to embroider, but to weave, and in the Arabic it signifies to make points, stripes, or lines, to work in mixed colours (see Hartmann die Hebrerinn am Putztisch iii. 138ff.). This curtain was to hang on five gilded pillars of acacia-wood with golden hooks, and for these they were to cast sockets of brass. In the account of the execution of this work in Ex 36:38, it is still further stated, that the architect covered the heads (capitals) of the pillars and their girders (חשׁקים, see Ex 27:10) with gold. From this it follows, that the pillars were not entirely gilded, but only the capitals, and that they were fastened together with gilded girders. These girders were either placed upon the hooks that were fastened to the tops of the pillars, or, what I think more probable, formed a kind of architrave above the pillars, in which case the covering as well as the inner curtain merely hung upon the hooks of the columns. But if the pillars were not gilded all over, we must necessarily imagine that curtain as hung upon that side of the pillars which was turned towards the holy place, so that none of the white wood was to be seen inside the holy place; and the gilding of the capitals and architrave merely served to impress upon the forefront of the tabernacle the glory of a house of God.
If we endeavour to understand the reason for building the dwelling in this manner, there can be no doubt that the design of the wooden walls was simply to give stability to the tabernacle. Acacia-wood was chosen, because the acacia was the only tree to be found in the desert of Arabia from which planks and beams could be cut, whilst the lightness an durability of this wood rendered it peculiarly suitable for a portable temple. The wooden framework was covered both within and without with hangings of drapery and other coverings, to give it the character of a tent, which is the term really applied to it in Ex 27:21, and in most instances afterwards. The sanctuary of Jehovah in the midst of His people was to be a tent, because, so long as the people were wandering about and dwelt in tents, the dwelling of their God in the midst of them must be a tent also. The division of the dwelling into two parts corresponded to the design of the tabernacle, where Jehovah desired not to dwell alone by Himself, but to come and meet with His people (Ex 25:22). The most holy place was the true dwelling of Jehovah, where He was enthroned in a cloud, the visible symbol of His presence, above the cherubim, upon the capporeth of the ark of the covenant. The holy place, on the other hand, was the place where His people were to appear before Him, and draw near to Him with their gifts, the fruits of their earthly vocation, and their prayers, and to rejoice before His face in the blessings of His covenant grace. By the establishment of the covenant of Jehovah with the people of Israel, the separation of man from God, of which the fall of the progenitors of our race had been the cause, was to be brought to an end; an institution was to be set up, pointing to the reunion of man and God, to true and full vital communion with Him; and by this the kingdom of God was to be founded on earth in a local and temporal form. This kingdom of God, which was founded in Israel, was to be embodied in the tabernacle, and shadowed forth in its earthly and visible form as confined within the limits of time and space. This meaning was indicated not only in the instructions to set up the dwelling according to the four quarters of the globe and heavens, with the entrance towards sunrise and the holy of holies towards the west, but also in the quadrangular form of the building, the dwelling as a whole assuming the form of an oblong of thirty cubits in length, and ten in breadth and height, whilst the most holy place was a cube of ten cubits in every direction. In the symbolism of antiquity, the square was a symbol of the universe or cosmos; and thus, too, in the symbolism of the Scriptures it is a type of the world as the scene of divine revelation, the sphere of the kingdom of God, for which the world from the very first had been intended by God, and to which, notwithstanding the fall of man, who was created lord of the earth, it was to be once more renewed and glorified. Hence the seal of the kingdom of God was impressed upon the sanctuary of God in Israel through the quadrangular form that was given to its separate rooms. And whilst the direction in which it was set up, towards the four quarters of the heavens, showed that the kingdom of God that was planted in Israel was intended to embrace the entire world, the oblong shape given to the whole building set forth the idea of the present incompleteness of the kingdom, and the cubic form of the most holy place its ideal and ultimate perfection.
(Note: The significant character of these different quadrangular forms is placed beyond all doubt, when we compare the tabernacle and Solomon's temple, which was built according to the same proportions, with the prophetic description of the temple and holy city in Ezek. 40-48, and that of the heavenly Jerusalem in Rev 21 and 22. Just as in both the tabernacle and Solomon's temple the most holy place was in the form of a perfect cube (of 10 and 20 cubits respectively), so John saw the city of God, which came down from God out of heaven, in the form of a perfect cube. "The length, and the breadth, and the height of it were equal," viz., 12,000 furlongs on every side (Rev_ 21:16), a symbolical representation of the idea, that the holy of holies in the temple will be seen in its perfected form in the heavenly Jerusalem, and God will dwell in it for ever, along with the just made perfect. This city of God is "the tabernacle of God with men;" it has no longer a temple, but the Lord God of Hosts and the Lamb are the temple of it (Rev_ 21:22), and those who dwell therein see the face of God and the Lamb (Ex 22:4). The square comes next to the cube, and the regular oblong next to this. The tabernacle was in the form of an oblong: the dwelling was 30 cubits long and 10 broad, and the court 100 cubits long and 50 bread. Solomon's temple, when regarded as a whole, was in the same form; it was 60 cubits long and 20 cubits broad, apart from the porch and side buildings. In Ezekiel's vision not only is the sanctuary a square of 500 reeds (Ezek 42:15-20; Ezek 45:2), but the inner court (Ezek 40:23, Ezek 40:27, Ezek 40:47), the paved space in the outer court (Ezek 40:19), and other parts also, are all in the form of squares. The city opposite to the temple was a square of 4500 reeds (Ezek 48:16), and the suburbs a square of 250 reeds on every side (Ezek 48:17). The idea thus symbolically expressed is, that the temple and city, and in fact the whole of the holy ground, already approximate to the form of the most holy place. Both the city and temple are still distinct from one another, although they both stand upon holy ground in the midst of the land (ch. 47 and 48); and in the temple itself the distinction between the holy place and the most holy is still maintained, although the most holy place is no longer separated by a curtain from the holy place; and in the same manner the distinction is still maintained between the temple-building and the courts, though the latter have acquired much greater importance than in Solomon's temple, and are very minutely described, whereas they are only very briefly referred to in the case of Solomon's temple. The sanctuary which Ezekiel saw, however, was only a symbol of the renewed and glorified kingdom of God, not of the perfected kingdom. This was first shown to the holy seer in Patmos, in the vision of the heavenly Jerusalem, as it appeared in a perfect cubical form.)
Yet even in its temporal form, it was perfect of its kind, and therefore the component parts of the quadrangular building were regulated by the number ten, the stamp of completeness.
The splendour of the building, as the earthly reflection of the glory of the kingdom of God, was also in harmony with this explanation of its meaning. In the dwelling itself everything was either overlaid with gold or made of pure gold, with the exception of the foundations or sockets of the boards and inner pillars, for which silver was used. In the gold, with its glorious, yea, godlike splendour (Job 37:22), the glory of the dwelling-place of God was reflected; whilst the silver, as the symbol of moral purity, shadowed forth the holiness of the foundation of the house or kingdom of God. The four colours, and the figures upon the drapery and curtains of the temple, were equally significant. Whilst the four colours, like the same number of coverings, showed their general purpose as connected with the building of the kingdom of God, the brilliant white of the byssus stands prominently out among the rest of the colours as the ground of the woven fabrics, and the colour which is invariably mentioned first. The splendid white byssus represented the holiness of the building; the hyacinth, a dark blue approaching black rather than bright blue, but the true colour of the sky in southern countries, its heavenly origin and character; the purple, a dark rich red, its royal glory; whilst the crimson, a light brilliant red, the colour of blood and vigorous life, set forth the strength of imperishable life in the abode and kingdom of the holy and glorious God-King. Lastly, through the figures of cherubim woven into these fabrics the dwelling became a symbolical representation of the kingdom of glory, in which the heavenly spirits surround the throne of God, the heavenly Jerusalem with its myriads of angels, the city of the living God, to which the people of God will come when their heavenly calling is fulfilled (Heb 12:22-23).
Geneva 1599
26:36 And thou shalt make an (n) hanging for the door of the tent, [of] blue, and purple, and scarlet, and fine twined linen, wrought with needlework.
(n) This hanging or veil was between the holy place, and there where the people were.
John Gill
26:36 And thou shalt make an hanging for the door of the tent,.... At the east end of the tabernacle, which lay open and exposed, and for which as yet there was no provision; the west end of it, where stood the holy of holies, was enclosed with six boards, and two corner ones, Ex 26:22 and the linen curtains hung down there to the silver bases, and so did the curtains of goats' hair, even to the ground, and half a curtain to spare, see Ex 26:12 but for the east end, or entrance into the tabernacle, there was nothing till now ordered, only the sixth curtain of the goats' hair curtains was there turned up double, Ex 26:9, but now here an "hanging" is ordered, or rather a "covering" (z), as the word signifies; Jarchi calls it a vail; and this was instead of a door to the tabernacle, and divided the holy place, into which only the priests might enter, from the place where the people stood and worshipped: and this also was made
of blue, and purple, and scarlet, and fine twined linen; as was the vail between the holy and the holy of holies; only with this difference, this was
wrought with needle work, and that was of "cunning work": the difference between these two, "Rokem" and "Chosheb", was, as Ben Melech from the Misnah relates, that "Rokem" is the work of a needle, and therefore but one face or figure is seen, that is, it is only seen on one side; but "Chosheb" is the work of a weaver, and therefore two faces or figures are seen, that is, they are seen on both sides; and with this account Maimonides agrees; see Gill on Ex 26:1, besides this hanging, Josephus (a) tells us there was another of linen, of the same size with this, and which covered it, and preserved it from the weather, and which on festival days was turned back, that the people might have a prospect of the other; just as there were curtains of goats' hair to preserve the linen ones.
(z) "operimentum", Montanus; "tegumentum", Junius & Tremellius, Piscator; "velum", Tigurine version, Drusius. (a) Antiqu. l. 3. c. 6. sect. 4.
Robert Jamieson, A. R. Fausset and David Brown
26:36 an hanging for the door of the tent--Curtains of rich and elaborate embroidery, made by the women, are suspended over the doors or entrances of the tents occupied by Eastern chiefs and princes. In a similar style of elegance was the hanging finished which was to cover the door of this tabernacle--the chosen habitation of the God and King of Israel. It appears from Ex 26:12, Ex 26:22-23, that the ark and mercy seat were placed in the west end of the tabernacle, and consequently the door or entrance fronted the east, so that the Israelites in worshipping Jehovah, turned their faces towards the west; that they might be thus figuratively taught to turn from the worship of that luminary which was the great idol of the nations, and to adore the God who made it and them [HEWLETT].
26:3726:37: Եւ արասցես վարագուրին հինգ սիւնակ յանփուտ փայտից. եւ օծցես զնոսա ոսկւո՛վ։ Եւ խոյակք նորա ոսկի՛ք. եւ ձուլեսցես նոցա հինգ խարիսխ պղնձի[738]։[738] Այլք. Յանփուտ փայտէ... եւ խոյակք նոցա ոսկիք։
37 Առագաստի համար կարծր փայտից հինգ մոյթ կը պատրաստես եւ դրանք կ’ոսկեզօծես: Դրանց խոյակները թող լինեն ոսկուց: Դրանց համար հինգ պղնձէ խարիսխ կը ձուլես»:
37 Դրան վարագոյրին համար Սատիմի փայտէ հինգ սիւն շինէ՛ ու զանոնք ոսկիով պատէ՛ եւ անոնց ճանկերը ոսկիէ թող ըլլան ու անոնց համար պղնձէ հինգ խարիսխ ձուլէ՛»։
Եւ արասցես վարագուրին հինգ սիւնակ յանփուտ փայտից, եւ [391]օծցես զնոսա ոսկւով, եւ [392]խոյակք նոցա ոսկիք. եւ ձուլեսցես նոցա հինգ խարիսխ պղնձի:

26:37: Եւ արասցես վարագուրին հինգ սիւնակ յանփուտ փայտից. եւ օծցես զնոսա ոսկւո՛վ։ Եւ խոյակք նորա ոսկի՛ք. եւ ձուլեսցես նոցա հինգ խարիսխ պղնձի[738]։
[738] Այլք. Յանփուտ փայտէ... եւ խոյակք նոցա ոսկիք։
37 Առագաստի համար կարծր փայտից հինգ մոյթ կը պատրաստես եւ դրանք կ’ոսկեզօծես: Դրանց խոյակները թող լինեն ոսկուց: Դրանց համար հինգ պղնձէ խարիսխ կը ձուլես»:
37 Դրան վարագոյրին համար Սատիմի փայտէ հինգ սիւն շինէ՛ ու զանոնք ոսկիով պատէ՛ եւ անոնց ճանկերը ոսկիէ թող ըլլան ու անոնց համար պղնձէ հինգ խարիսխ ձուլէ՛»։
zohrab-1805▾ eastern-1994▾ western am▾
26:3737: и сделай для завесы пять столбов из ситтим и обложи их золотом; крючки к ним золотые; и вылей для них пять подножий медных.
26:37 καὶ και and; even ποιήσεις ποιεω do; make τῷ ο the καταπετάσματι καταπετασμα veil πέντε πεντε five στύλους στυλος pillar καὶ και and; even χρυσώσεις χρυσοω gild αὐτοὺς αυτος he; him χρυσίῳ χρυσιον gold piece; gold leaf καὶ και and; even αἱ ο the κεφαλίδες κεφαλις heading αὐτῶν αυτος he; him χρυσαῖ χρυσεος of gold; golden καὶ και and; even χωνεύσεις χωνευω he; him πέντε πεντε five βάσεις βασις sole of the foot χαλκᾶς χαλκεος of brass
26:37 וְ wᵊ וְ and עָשִׂ֣יתָ ʕāśˈîṯā עשׂה make לַ la לְ to † הַ the מָּסָ֗ךְ mmāsˈāḵ מָסָךְ covering חֲמִשָּׁה֙ ḥᵃmiššˌā חָמֵשׁ five עַמּוּדֵ֣י ʕammûḏˈê עַמּוּד pillar שִׁטִּ֔ים šiṭṭˈîm שִׁטָּה acacia וְ wᵊ וְ and צִפִּיתָ֤ ṣippîṯˈā צפה arrange אֹתָם֙ ʔōṯˌām אֵת [object marker] זָהָ֔ב zāhˈāv זָהָב gold וָוֵיהֶ֖ם wāwêhˌem וָו hook זָהָ֑ב zāhˈāv זָהָב gold וְ wᵊ וְ and יָצַקְתָּ֣ yāṣaqtˈā יצק pour לָהֶ֔ם lāhˈem לְ to חֲמִשָּׁ֖ה ḥᵃmiššˌā חָמֵשׁ five אַדְנֵ֥י ʔaḏnˌê אֶדֶן pedestal נְחֹֽשֶׁת׃ ס nᵊḥˈōšeṯ . s נְחֹשֶׁת bronze
26:37. et quinque columnas deaurabis lignorum setthim ante quas ducetur tentorium quarum erunt capita aurea et bases aeneaeAnd thou shalt overlay with gold five pillars of setim wood, before which the hanging shall be drawn: their heads shall be of gold, and the sockets of brass.
37. And thou shalt make for the screen five pillars of acacia, and overlay them with gold; their hooks shall be of gold: and thou shalt cast five sockets of brass for them.
And thou shalt make for the hanging five pillars [of] shittim [wood], and overlay them with gold, [and] their hooks [shall be of] gold: and thou shalt cast five sockets of brass for them:

37: и сделай для завесы пять столбов из ситтим и обложи их золотом; крючки к ним золотые; и вылей для них пять подножий медных.
26:37
καὶ και and; even
ποιήσεις ποιεω do; make
τῷ ο the
καταπετάσματι καταπετασμα veil
πέντε πεντε five
στύλους στυλος pillar
καὶ και and; even
χρυσώσεις χρυσοω gild
αὐτοὺς αυτος he; him
χρυσίῳ χρυσιον gold piece; gold leaf
καὶ και and; even
αἱ ο the
κεφαλίδες κεφαλις heading
αὐτῶν αυτος he; him
χρυσαῖ χρυσεος of gold; golden
καὶ και and; even
χωνεύσεις χωνευω he; him
πέντε πεντε five
βάσεις βασις sole of the foot
χαλκᾶς χαλκεος of brass
26:37
וְ wᵊ וְ and
עָשִׂ֣יתָ ʕāśˈîṯā עשׂה make
לַ la לְ to
הַ the
מָּסָ֗ךְ mmāsˈāḵ מָסָךְ covering
חֲמִשָּׁה֙ ḥᵃmiššˌā חָמֵשׁ five
עַמּוּדֵ֣י ʕammûḏˈê עַמּוּד pillar
שִׁטִּ֔ים šiṭṭˈîm שִׁטָּה acacia
וְ wᵊ וְ and
צִפִּיתָ֤ ṣippîṯˈā צפה arrange
אֹתָם֙ ʔōṯˌām אֵת [object marker]
זָהָ֔ב zāhˈāv זָהָב gold
וָוֵיהֶ֖ם wāwêhˌem וָו hook
זָהָ֑ב zāhˈāv זָהָב gold
וְ wᵊ וְ and
יָצַקְתָּ֣ yāṣaqtˈā יצק pour
לָהֶ֔ם lāhˈem לְ to
חֲמִשָּׁ֖ה ḥᵃmiššˌā חָמֵשׁ five
אַדְנֵ֥י ʔaḏnˌê אֶדֶן pedestal
נְחֹֽשֶׁת׃ ס nᵊḥˈōšeṯ . s נְחֹשֶׁת bronze
26:37. et quinque columnas deaurabis lignorum setthim ante quas ducetur tentorium quarum erunt capita aurea et bases aeneae
And thou shalt overlay with gold five pillars of setim wood, before which the hanging shall be drawn: their heads shall be of gold, and the sockets of brass.
ru▾ LXX-gloss▾ bhs-gloss▾ vulgate▾ erva_1895▾
jg▾ tr▾ ab▾ tb▾ all ▾
А. П. Лопухин: Tолковая Библия или комментарий на все книги Св.Писания Ветхого и Нового Заветов - 1903-1914
37: Для утверждения завесы было поставлено на восточной стороне пять колонн. Так как им дается по одной подставе, а брусья стен скинии имели по две, то отсюда заключают, что колонны были уже брусьев. И действительно, если бы ширина каждого из них равнялась 1: 1/2: локтям, то пять колонн поглощали бы от ширины святилища семь с половиной локтей; промежутки, предназначенные для входа, были бы слишком узки.
Albert Barnes: Notes on the Bible - 1834
26:37
Rice pillars - These, it should be observed, belonged to the entrance of the tent, not, in their architectural relation, to the entrance of the tabernacle.
Sockets of brass - Their bases (see Exo 26:19) were of bronze (like the taches of the tentcloth, Exo 26:11), not of silver, to mark the inferiority of the tent to the tabernacle.
We are indebted to Mr. Fergusson for what may be regarded as a satisfactory reconstruction of the sanctuary in all its main particulars. He holds that what sheltered the Mishkan was actually a tent of ordinary form, such as common sense and practical experience would suggest as best suited for the purpose.
According to this view the five pillars at the entrance of the tent Exo 26:37 were graduated as they would naturally be at the entrance of any large tent of the best form, the tallest one being in the middle to support one end of a ridge-pole.
Such a ridge-pole, which must have been sixty feet in length, would have required support, and this might have been afforded by a plain pole in the middle of the structure. Over this framing of wood-work the tent-cloth of goats' hair was strained with its cords and tent-pins in the usual way. (See cut.)
Above the tent-cloth of goats' hair was spread the covering of red rams' skins.
The five pillars, to reach across the front of the tent, must have stood five cubits (about 7 1/2 ft.) apart. Their heads were united by connecting rods ("fillets" Exo 27:10) overlaid with gold Exo 36:38. The spaces at the sides and back may have been wholly or in part covered in for the use of the officiating priests, like the small apartments which in after times skirted three sides of the temple. It was probably here that those portions of the sacrifices were eaten which were not to be carried out of the sacred precincts Lev 6:16, Lev 6:26. We may also infer that priests lodged in them. Compare Sa1 3:2-3.
R. A. Torrey - Treasury: Treasury of Scriptural Knowledge - 1880
26:37: overlay them with gold: Exo 36:38
John Gill
26:37 And thou shalt make for the hanging five pillars of shittim wood,.... One at each corner of the entrance into the tabernacle, and the other three at a proper distance from each other, so as to make four ways for the priests to enter in at; as there might very well be, since there was a breadth of ten cubits, or five yards or more:
and overlay them with gold; with plates of gold, for a gild would soon wear off by continual use in passing and repassing. This is to be understood not of the whole pillars, but of the chapiters, heads, tops, or knobs of them, and of their fillets or girdles; in some parts of them the wood appearing, as is plain from Ex 36:38,
and their hooks shall be of gold; on which the hanging, covering, or vail was hung:
and thou shalt cast five sockets of brass for them; for the pillars to stand upon them, and were of a meaner metal than those on which the pillars for the vail before mentioned; that being the entrance into the holy of holies, where the divine Majesty dwelt, this into the holy place where the priests did their service.